author | Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de> |
Wed, 21 Sep 2011 19:57:17 +0200 | |
changeset 3041 | 119b9f7e34c0 |
parent 3039 | 3941fa3f179a |
child 3042 | 9b9723930a02 |
permissions | -rw-r--r-- |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1 |
(*<*) |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2 |
theory Paper |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
3 |
imports "../Nominal/Nominal2" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
4 |
"~~/src/HOL/Library/LaTeXsugar" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
5 |
begin |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
6 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
7 |
consts |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
8 |
fv :: "'a \<Rightarrow> 'b" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
9 |
abs_set :: "'a \<Rightarrow> 'b \<Rightarrow> 'c" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
10 |
alpha_bn :: "'a \<Rightarrow> 'a \<Rightarrow> bool" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
11 |
abs_set2 :: "'a \<Rightarrow> perm \<Rightarrow> 'b \<Rightarrow> 'c" |
3016 | 12 |
equ2 :: "'a \<Rightarrow> 'a \<Rightarrow> bool" |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
13 |
Abs_dist :: "'a \<Rightarrow> 'b \<Rightarrow> 'c" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
14 |
Abs_print :: "'a \<Rightarrow> 'b \<Rightarrow> 'c" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
15 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
16 |
definition |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
17 |
"equal \<equiv> (op =)" |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
18 |
|
3006 | 19 |
fun alpha_set_ex where |
20 |
"alpha_set_ex (bs, x) R f (cs, y) = (\<exists>pi. alpha_set (bs, x) R f pi (cs, y))" |
|
21 |
||
22 |
fun alpha_res_ex where |
|
23 |
"alpha_res_ex (bs, x) R f pi (cs, y) = (\<exists>pi. alpha_res (bs, x) R f pi (cs, y))" |
|
24 |
||
25 |
fun alpha_lst_ex where |
|
26 |
"alpha_lst_ex (bs, x) R f pi (cs, y) = (\<exists>pi. alpha_lst (bs, x) R f pi (cs, y))" |
|
27 |
||
28 |
||
29 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
30 |
notation (latex output) |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
31 |
swap ("'(_ _')" [1000, 1000] 1000) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
32 |
fresh ("_ # _" [51, 51] 50) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
33 |
fresh_star ("_ #\<^sup>* _" [51, 51] 50) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
34 |
supp ("supp _" [78] 73) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
35 |
uminus ("-_" [78] 73) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
36 |
If ("if _ then _ else _" 10) and |
3006 | 37 |
alpha_set_ex ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:\,\raisebox{-1pt}{\makebox[0mm][l]{$_{\textit{set}}$}}>\<^bsup>_, _\<^esup> _") and |
38 |
alpha_lst_ex ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:\,\raisebox{-1pt}{\makebox[0mm][l]{$_{\textit{list}}$}}>\<^bsup>_, _\<^esup> _") and |
|
39 |
alpha_res_ex ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:\,\raisebox{-1pt}{\makebox[0mm][l]{$_{\textit{set+}}$}}>\<^bsup>_, _\<^esup> _") and |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
40 |
abs_set ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:{$\,_{\textit{abs\_set}}$}> _") and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
41 |
abs_set2 ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:\raisebox{-1pt}{\makebox[0mm][l]{$\,_{\textit{list}}$}}>\<^bsup>_\<^esup> _") and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
42 |
fv ("fa'(_')" [100] 100) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
43 |
equal ("=") and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
44 |
alpha_abs_set ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:{$\,_{\textit{abs\_set}}$}> _") and |
3002 | 45 |
alpha_abs_lst ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:{$\,_{\textit{abs\_list}}$}> _") and |
46 |
alpha_abs_res ("_ \<approx>\<^raw:{$\,_{\textit{abs\_set+}}$}> _") and |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
47 |
Abs_set ("[_]\<^bsub>set\<^esub>._" [20, 101] 999) and |
3021 | 48 |
Abs_lst ("[_]\<^bsub>list\<^esub>._" [20, 101] 999) and |
49 |
Abs_dist ("[_]\<^bsub>#list\<^esub>._" [20, 101] 999) and |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
50 |
Abs_res ("[_]\<^bsub>set+\<^esub>._") and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
51 |
Abs_print ("_\<^bsub>set\<^esub>._") and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
52 |
Cons ("_::_" [78,77] 73) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
53 |
supp_set ("aux _" [1000] 10) and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
54 |
alpha_bn ("_ \<approx>bn _") |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
55 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
56 |
consts alpha_trm ::'a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
57 |
consts fa_trm :: 'a |
3016 | 58 |
consts fa_trm_al :: 'a |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
59 |
consts alpha_trm2 ::'a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
60 |
consts fa_trm2 :: 'a |
3016 | 61 |
consts fa_trm2_al :: 'a |
62 |
consts supp2 :: 'a |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
63 |
consts ast :: 'a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
64 |
consts ast' :: 'a |
3016 | 65 |
consts bn_al :: "'b \<Rightarrow> 'a" |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
66 |
notation (latex output) |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
67 |
alpha_trm ("\<approx>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>") and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
68 |
fa_trm ("fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>") and |
3016 | 69 |
fa_trm_al ("fa\<AL>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>") and |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
70 |
alpha_trm2 ("'(\<approx>\<^bsub>assn\<^esub>, \<approx>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>')") and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
71 |
fa_trm2 ("'(fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub>, fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>')") and |
3016 | 72 |
fa_trm2_al ("'(fa\<AL>\<^bsub>assn\<^esub>, fa\<AL>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>')") and |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
73 |
ast ("'(as, t')") and |
3016 | 74 |
ast' ("'(as', t\<PRIME> ')") and |
75 |
equ2 ("'(=, =')") and |
|
76 |
supp2 ("'(supp, supp')") and |
|
3018 | 77 |
bn_al ("bn\<^sup>\<alpha> _" [100] 100) |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
78 |
(*>*) |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
79 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
80 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
81 |
section {* Introduction *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
82 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
83 |
text {* |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
84 |
So far, Nominal Isabelle provided a mechanism for constructing alpha-equated |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
85 |
terms, for example lambda-terms |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
86 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
87 |
\[ |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
88 |
@{text "t ::= x | t t | \<lambda>x. t"} |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
89 |
\]\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
90 |
|
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
91 |
\noindent |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
92 |
where free and bound variables have names. For such alpha-equated terms, |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
93 |
Nominal Isabelle derives automatically a reasoning infrastructure that has |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
94 |
been used successfully in formalisations of an equivalence checking |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
95 |
algorithm for LF \cite{UrbanCheneyBerghofer08}, Typed |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
96 |
Scheme~\cite{TobinHochstadtFelleisen08}, several calculi for concurrency |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
97 |
\cite{BengtsonParow09} and a strong normalisation result for cut-elimination |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
98 |
in classical logic \cite{UrbanZhu08}. It has also been used by Pollack for |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
99 |
formalisations in the locally-nameless approach to binding |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
100 |
\cite{SatoPollack10}. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
101 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
102 |
However, Nominal Isabelle has fared less well in a formalisation of the |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
103 |
algorithm W \cite{UrbanNipkow09}, where types and type-schemes are, |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
104 |
respectively, of the form |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
105 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
106 |
\begin{equation}\label{tysch} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
107 |
\begin{array}{l} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
108 |
@{text "T ::= x | T \<rightarrow> T"}\hspace{15mm} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
109 |
@{text "S ::= \<forall>{x\<^isub>1,\<dots>, x\<^isub>n}. T"} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
110 |
\end{array} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
111 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
112 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
113 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
114 |
and the @{text "\<forall>"}-quantification binds a finite (possibly empty) set of |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
115 |
type-variables. While it is possible to implement this kind of more general |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
116 |
binders by iterating single binders, this leads to a rather clumsy |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
117 |
formalisation of W. The need of iterating single binders is also one reason |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
118 |
why Nominal Isabelle and similar theorem provers that only provide |
3002 | 119 |
mechanisms for binding single variables have not fared extremely well with |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
120 |
the more advanced tasks in the POPLmark challenge \cite{challenge05}, |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
121 |
because also there one would like to bind multiple variables at once. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
122 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
123 |
Binding multiple variables has interesting properties that cannot be captured |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
124 |
easily by iterating single binders. For example in the case of type-schemes we do not |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
125 |
want to make a distinction about the order of the bound variables. Therefore |
3001 | 126 |
we would like to regard in \eqref{ex1} below the first pair of type-schemes as alpha-equivalent, |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
127 |
but assuming that @{text x}, @{text y} and @{text z} are distinct variables, |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
128 |
the second pair should \emph{not} be alpha-equivalent: |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
129 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
130 |
\begin{equation}\label{ex1} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
131 |
@{text "\<forall>{x, y}. x \<rightarrow> y \<approx>\<^isub>\<alpha> \<forall>{y, x}. y \<rightarrow> x"}\hspace{10mm} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
132 |
@{text "\<forall>{x, y}. x \<rightarrow> y \<notapprox>\<^isub>\<alpha> \<forall>{z}. z \<rightarrow> z"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
133 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
134 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
135 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
136 |
Moreover, we like to regard type-schemes as alpha-equivalent, if they differ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
137 |
only on \emph{vacuous} binders, such as |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
138 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
139 |
\begin{equation}\label{ex3} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
140 |
@{text "\<forall>{x}. x \<rightarrow> y \<approx>\<^isub>\<alpha> \<forall>{x, z}. x \<rightarrow> y"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
141 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
142 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
143 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
144 |
where @{text z} does not occur freely in the type. In this paper we will |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
145 |
give a general binding mechanism and associated notion of alpha-equivalence |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
146 |
that can be used to faithfully represent this kind of binding in Nominal |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
147 |
Isabelle. The difficulty of finding the right notion for alpha-equivalence |
3002 | 148 |
can be appreciated in this case by considering that the definition given for |
149 |
type-schemes by Leroy in \cite[Page 18--19]{Leroy92} is incorrect (it omits a side-condition). |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
150 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
151 |
However, the notion of alpha-equivalence that is preserved by vacuous |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
152 |
binders is not always wanted. For example in terms like |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
153 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
154 |
\begin{equation}\label{one} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
155 |
@{text "\<LET> x = 3 \<AND> y = 2 \<IN> x - y \<END>"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
156 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
157 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
158 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
159 |
we might not care in which order the assignments @{text "x = 3"} and |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
160 |
\mbox{@{text "y = 2"}} are given, but it would be often unusual (particularly |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
161 |
in strict languages) to regard \eqref{one} as alpha-equivalent with |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
162 |
|
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
163 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
164 |
@{text "\<LET> x = 3 \<AND> y = 2 \<AND> z = foo \<IN> x - y \<END>"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
165 |
\]\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
166 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
167 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
168 |
Therefore we will also provide a separate binding mechanism for cases in |
3023 | 169 |
which the order of binders does not matter, but the `cardinality' of the |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
170 |
binders has to agree. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
171 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
172 |
However, we found that this is still not sufficient for dealing with |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
173 |
language constructs frequently occurring in programming language |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
174 |
research. For example in @{text "\<LET>"}s containing patterns like |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
175 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
176 |
\begin{equation}\label{two} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
177 |
@{text "\<LET> (x, y) = (3, 2) \<IN> x - y \<END>"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
178 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
179 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
180 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
181 |
we want to bind all variables from the pattern inside the body of the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
182 |
$\mathtt{let}$, but we also care about the order of these variables, since |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
183 |
we do not want to regard \eqref{two} as alpha-equivalent with |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
184 |
|
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
185 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
186 |
@{text "\<LET> (y, x) = (3, 2) \<IN> x - y \<END>"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
187 |
\]\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
188 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
189 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
190 |
As a result, we provide three general binding mechanisms each of which binds |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
191 |
multiple variables at once, and let the user chose which one is intended |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
192 |
when formalising a term-calculus. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
193 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
194 |
By providing these general binding mechanisms, however, we have to work |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
195 |
around a problem that has been pointed out by Pottier \cite{Pottier06} and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
196 |
Cheney \cite{Cheney05}: in @{text "\<LET>"}-constructs of the form |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
197 |
|
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
198 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
199 |
@{text "\<LET> x\<^isub>1 = t\<^isub>1 \<AND> \<dots> \<AND> x\<^isub>n = t\<^isub>n \<IN> s \<END>"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
200 |
\]\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
201 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
202 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
203 |
we care about the information that there are as many bound variables @{text |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
204 |
"x\<^isub>i"} as there are @{text "t\<^isub>i"}. We lose this information if |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
205 |
we represent the @{text "\<LET>"}-constructor by something like |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
206 |
|
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
207 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
208 |
@{text "\<LET> (\<lambda>x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>n . s) [t\<^isub>1,\<dots>,t\<^isub>n]"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
209 |
\]\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
210 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
211 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
212 |
where the notation @{text "\<lambda>_ . _"} indicates that the list of @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
213 |
"x\<^isub>i"} becomes bound in @{text s}. In this representation the term |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
214 |
\mbox{@{text "\<LET> (\<lambda>x . s) [t\<^isub>1, t\<^isub>2]"}} is a perfectly |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
215 |
legal instance, but the lengths of the two lists do not agree. To exclude |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
216 |
such terms, additional predicates about well-formed terms are needed in |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
217 |
order to ensure that the two lists are of equal length. This can result in |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
218 |
very messy reasoning (see for example~\cite{BengtsonParow09}). To avoid |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
219 |
this, we will allow type specifications for @{text "\<LET>"}s as follows |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
220 |
|
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
221 |
\[ |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
222 |
\mbox{\begin{tabular}{r@ {\hspace{2mm}}r@ {\hspace{2mm}}ll} |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
223 |
@{text trm} & @{text "::="} & @{text "\<dots>"} \\ |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
224 |
& @{text "|"} & @{text "\<LET> as::assn s::trm"}\hspace{2mm} |
3004 | 225 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn(as)"} \isacommand{in} @{text "s"}\\[1mm] |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
226 |
@{text assn} & @{text "::="} & @{text "\<ANIL>"}\\ |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
227 |
& @{text "|"} & @{text "\<ACONS> name trm assn"} |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
228 |
\end{tabular}} |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
229 |
\]\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
230 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
231 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
232 |
where @{text assn} is an auxiliary type representing a list of assignments |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
233 |
and @{text bn} an auxiliary function identifying the variables to be bound |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
234 |
by the @{text "\<LET>"}. This function can be defined by recursion over @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
235 |
assn} as follows |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
236 |
|
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
237 |
\[ |
3025 | 238 |
@{text "bn(\<ANIL>) ="}~@{term "{}"} \hspace{10mm} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
239 |
@{text "bn(\<ACONS> x t as) = {x} \<union> bn(as)"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
240 |
\]\smallskip |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
241 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
242 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
243 |
The scope of the binding is indicated by labels given to the types, for |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
244 |
example @{text "s::trm"}, and a binding clause, in this case |
3004 | 245 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn(as)"} \isacommand{in} @{text "s"}. This binding |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
246 |
clause states that all the names the function @{text "bn(as)"} returns |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
247 |
should be bound in @{text s}. This style of specifying terms and bindings |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
248 |
is heavily inspired by the syntax of the Ott-tool \cite{ott-jfp}. Our work |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
249 |
extends Ott in several aspects: one is that we support three binding |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
250 |
modes---Ott has only one, namely the one where the order of binders matters. |
3000 | 251 |
Another is that our reasoning infrastructure, like strong induction principles |
252 |
and the notion of free variables, is derived from first principles within |
|
253 |
the Isabelle/HOL theorem prover. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
254 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
255 |
However, we will not be able to cope with all specifications that are |
3023 | 256 |
allowed by Ott. One reason is that Ott lets the user specify `empty' types |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
257 |
like \mbox{@{text "t ::= t t | \<lambda>x. t"}} where no clause for variables is |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
258 |
given. Arguably, such specifications make some sense in the context of Coq's |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
259 |
type theory (which Ott supports), but not at all in a HOL-based environment |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
260 |
where every datatype must have a non-empty set-theoretic model |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
261 |
\cite{Berghofer99}. Another reason is that we establish the reasoning |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
262 |
infrastructure for alpha-\emph{equated} terms. In contrast, Ott produces a |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
263 |
reasoning infrastructure in Isabelle/HOL for \emph{non}-alpha-equated, or |
3025 | 264 |
`raw', terms. While our alpha-equated terms and the `raw' terms produced by |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
265 |
Ott use names for bound variables, there is a key difference: working with |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
266 |
alpha-equated terms means, for example, that the two type-schemes |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
267 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
268 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
269 |
@{text "\<forall>{x}. x \<rightarrow> y = \<forall>{x, z}. x \<rightarrow> y"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
270 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
271 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
272 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
273 |
are not just alpha-equal, but actually \emph{equal}! As a result, we can |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
274 |
only support specifications that make sense on the level of alpha-equated |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
275 |
terms (offending specifications, which for example bind a variable according |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
276 |
to a variable bound somewhere else, are not excluded by Ott, but we have |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
277 |
to). |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
278 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
279 |
Our insistence on reasoning with alpha-equated terms comes from the |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
280 |
wealth of experience we gained with the older version of Nominal Isabelle: |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
281 |
for non-trivial properties, reasoning with alpha-equated terms is much |
3025 | 282 |
easier than reasoning with `raw' terms. The fundamental reason for this is |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
283 |
that the HOL-logic underlying Nominal Isabelle allows us to replace |
3023 | 284 |
`equals-by-equals'. In contrast, replacing |
285 |
`alpha-equals-by-alpha-equals' in a representation based on `raw' terms |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
286 |
requires a lot of extra reasoning work. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
287 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
288 |
Although in informal settings a reasoning infrastructure for alpha-equated |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
289 |
terms is nearly always taken for granted, establishing it automatically in |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
290 |
Isabelle/HOL is a rather non-trivial task. For every |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
291 |
specification we will need to construct type(s) containing as elements the |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
292 |
alpha-equated terms. To do so, we use the standard HOL-technique of defining |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
293 |
a new type by identifying a non-empty subset of an existing type. The |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
294 |
construction we perform in Isabelle/HOL can be illustrated by the following picture: |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
295 |
|
3008 | 296 |
\begin{equation}\label{picture} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
297 |
\mbox{\begin{tikzpicture}[scale=1.1] |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
298 |
%\draw[step=2mm] (-4,-1) grid (4,1); |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
299 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
300 |
\draw[very thick] (0.7,0.4) circle (4.25mm); |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
301 |
\draw[rounded corners=1mm, very thick] ( 0.0,-0.8) rectangle ( 1.8, 0.9); |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
302 |
\draw[rounded corners=1mm, very thick] (-1.95,0.85) rectangle (-2.85,-0.05); |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
303 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
304 |
\draw (-2.0, 0.845) -- (0.7,0.845); |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
305 |
\draw (-2.0,-0.045) -- (0.7,-0.045); |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
306 |
|
3022
4de1d6ab04f7
included comments from Ramana
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
3021
diff
changeset
|
307 |
\draw ( 0.7, 0.5) node {\footnotesize\begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {}}$\alpha$-\\[-1mm]classes\end{tabular}}; |
4de1d6ab04f7
included comments from Ramana
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
3021
diff
changeset
|
308 |
\draw (-2.4, 0.5) node {\footnotesize\begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {}}$\alpha$-eq.\\[-1mm]terms\end{tabular}}; |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
309 |
\draw (1.8, 0.48) node[right=-0.1mm] |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
310 |
{\small\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}}existing\\[-1mm] type\\ (sets of raw terms)\end{tabular}}; |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
311 |
\draw (0.9, -0.35) node {\footnotesize\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}}non-empty\\[-1mm]subset\end{tabular}}; |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
312 |
\draw (-3.25, 0.55) node {\small\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}}new\\[-1mm]type\end{tabular}}; |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
313 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
314 |
\draw[<->, very thick] (-1.8, 0.3) -- (-0.1,0.3); |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
315 |
\draw (-0.95, 0.3) node[above=0mm] {\footnotesize{}isomorphism}; |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
316 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
317 |
\end{tikzpicture}} |
3008 | 318 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
319 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
320 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
321 |
We take as the starting point a definition of raw terms (defined as a |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
322 |
datatype in Isabelle/HOL); then identify the alpha-equivalence classes in |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
323 |
the type of sets of raw terms according to our alpha-equivalence relation, |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
324 |
and finally define the new type as these alpha-equivalence classes (the |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
325 |
non-emptiness requirement is always satisfied whenever the raw terms are |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
326 |
definable as datatype in Isabelle/HOL and our relation for alpha-equivalence |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
327 |
is an equivalence relation). |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
328 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
329 |
The fact that we obtain an isomorphism between the new type and the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
330 |
non-empty subset shows that the new type is a faithful representation of |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
331 |
alpha-equated terms. That is not the case for example for terms using the |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
332 |
locally nameless representation of binders \cite{McKinnaPollack99}: in this |
3023 | 333 |
representation there are `junk' terms that need to be excluded by |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
334 |
reasoning about a well-formedness predicate. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
335 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
336 |
The problem with introducing a new type in Isabelle/HOL is that in order to |
3023 | 337 |
be useful, a reasoning infrastructure needs to be `lifted' from the |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
338 |
underlying subset to the new type. This is usually a tricky and arduous |
2990
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
339 |
task. To ease it, we re-implemented in Isabelle/HOL \cite{KaliszykUrban11} |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
340 |
the quotient package described by Homeier \cite{Homeier05} for the HOL4 |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
341 |
system. This package allows us to lift definitions and theorems involving |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
342 |
raw terms to definitions and theorems involving alpha-equated terms. For |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
343 |
example if we define the free-variable function over raw lambda-terms |
2991 | 344 |
as follows |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
345 |
|
2990
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
346 |
\[ |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
347 |
\mbox{\begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{1mm}}r@ {\hspace{1mm}}l} |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
348 |
@{text "fv(x)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "{x}"}\\ |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
349 |
@{text "fv(t\<^isub>1 t\<^isub>2)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "fv(t\<^isub>1) \<union> fv(t\<^isub>2)"}\\ |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
350 |
@{text "fv(\<lambda>x.t)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "fv(t) - {x}"} |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
351 |
\end{tabular}} |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
352 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
353 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
354 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
355 |
then with the help of the quotient package we can obtain a function @{text "fv\<^sup>\<alpha>"} |
3000 | 356 |
operating on quotients, that is alpha-equivalence classes of lambda-terms. This |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
357 |
lifted function is characterised by the equations |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
358 |
|
2990
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
359 |
\[ |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
360 |
\mbox{\begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{1mm}}r@ {\hspace{1mm}}l} |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
361 |
@{text "fv\<^sup>\<alpha>(x)"} & @{text "="} & @{text "{x}"}\\ |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
362 |
@{text "fv\<^sup>\<alpha>(t\<^isub>1 t\<^isub>2)"} & @{text "="} & @{text "fv\<^sup>\<alpha>(t\<^isub>1) \<union> fv\<^sup>\<alpha>(t\<^isub>2)"}\\ |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
363 |
@{text "fv\<^sup>\<alpha>(\<lambda>x.t)"} & @{text "="} & @{text "fv\<^sup>\<alpha>(t) - {x}"} |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
364 |
\end{tabular}} |
5d145fe77ec1
a little tuning on the paper
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2989
diff
changeset
|
365 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
366 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
367 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
368 |
(Note that this means also the term-constructors for variables, applications |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
369 |
and lambda are lifted to the quotient level.) This construction, of course, |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
370 |
only works if alpha-equivalence is indeed an equivalence relation, and the |
3023 | 371 |
`raw' definitions and theorems are respectful w.r.t.~alpha-equivalence. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
372 |
For example, we will not be able to lift a bound-variable function. Although |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
373 |
this function can be defined for raw terms, it does not respect |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
374 |
alpha-equivalence and therefore cannot be lifted. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
375 |
To sum up, every lifting |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
376 |
of theorems to the quotient level needs proofs of some respectfulness |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
377 |
properties (see \cite{Homeier05}). In the paper we show that we are able to |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
378 |
automate these proofs and as a result can automatically establish a reasoning |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
379 |
infrastructure for alpha-equated terms.\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
380 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
381 |
The examples we have in mind where our reasoning infrastructure will be |
3003 | 382 |
helpful include the term language of Core-Haskell (see |
2991 | 383 |
Figure~\ref{corehas}). This term language involves patterns that have lists |
384 |
of type-, coercion- and term-variables, all of which are bound in @{text |
|
385 |
"\<CASE>"}-expressions. In these patterns we do not know in advance how many |
|
3002 | 386 |
variables need to be bound. Another example is the algorithm W, |
3000 | 387 |
which includes multiple binders in type-schemes.\medskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
388 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
389 |
\noindent |
3021 | 390 |
{\bf Contributions:} We provide three new definitions for when terms |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
391 |
involving general binders are alpha-equivalent. These definitions are |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
392 |
inspired by earlier work of Pitts \cite{Pitts04}. By means of automatic |
3021 | 393 |
proofs, we establish a reasoning infrastructure for alpha-equated terms, |
394 |
including properties about support, freshness and equality conditions for |
|
395 |
alpha-equated terms. We are also able to automatically derive strong |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
396 |
induction principles that have the variable convention already built in. |
3025 | 397 |
For this we simplify the earlier automated proofs by using the proving tools |
3021 | 398 |
from the function package~\cite{Krauss09} of Isabelle/HOL. The method |
399 |
behind our specification of general binders is taken from the Ott-tool, but |
|
400 |
we introduce crucial restrictions, and also extensions, so that our |
|
401 |
specifications make sense for reasoning about alpha-equated terms. The main |
|
402 |
improvement over Ott is that we introduce three binding modes (only one is |
|
403 |
present in Ott), provide formalised definitions for alpha-equivalence and |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
404 |
for free variables of our terms, and also derive a reasoning infrastructure |
3023 | 405 |
for our specifications from `first principles' inside a theorem prover. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
406 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
407 |
|
3021 | 408 |
\begin{figure}[t] |
2991 | 409 |
\begin{boxedminipage}{\linewidth} |
410 |
\begin{center} |
|
411 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {\hspace{8mm}}r@ {\hspace{2mm}}r@ {\hspace{2mm}}l} |
|
412 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Type Kinds}\\ |
|
413 |
@{text "\<kappa>"} & @{text "::="} & @{text "\<star> | \<kappa>\<^isub>1 \<rightarrow> \<kappa>\<^isub>2"}\smallskip\\ |
|
414 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Coercion Kinds}\\ |
|
415 |
@{text "\<iota>"} & @{text "::="} & @{text "\<sigma>\<^isub>1 \<sim> \<sigma>\<^isub>2"}\smallskip\\ |
|
416 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Types}\\ |
|
417 |
@{text "\<sigma>"} & @{text "::="} & @{text "a | T | \<sigma>\<^isub>1 \<sigma>\<^isub>2 | S\<^isub>n"}$\;\overline{@{text "\<sigma>"}}$@{text "\<^sup>n"} |
|
418 |
@{text "| \<forall>a:\<kappa>. \<sigma> | \<iota> \<Rightarrow> \<sigma>"}\smallskip\\ |
|
419 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Coercion Types}\\ |
|
420 |
@{text "\<gamma>"} & @{text "::="} & @{text "c | C | \<gamma>\<^isub>1 \<gamma>\<^isub>2 | S\<^isub>n"}$\;\overline{@{text "\<gamma>"}}$@{text "\<^sup>n"} |
|
421 |
@{text "| \<forall>c:\<iota>. \<gamma> | \<iota> \<Rightarrow> \<gamma> | refl \<sigma> | sym \<gamma> | \<gamma>\<^isub>1 \<circ> \<gamma>\<^isub>2"}\\ |
|
422 |
& @{text "|"} & @{text "\<gamma> @ \<sigma> | left \<gamma> | right \<gamma> | \<gamma>\<^isub>1 \<sim> \<gamma>\<^isub>2 | rightc \<gamma> | leftc \<gamma> | \<gamma>\<^isub>1 \<triangleright> \<gamma>\<^isub>2"}\smallskip\\ |
|
423 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Terms}\\ |
|
424 |
@{text "e"} & @{text "::="} & @{text "x | K | \<Lambda>a:\<kappa>. e | \<Lambda>c:\<iota>. e | e \<sigma> | e \<gamma> | \<lambda>x:\<sigma>. e | e\<^isub>1 e\<^isub>2"}\\ |
|
425 |
& @{text "|"} & @{text "\<LET> x:\<sigma> = e\<^isub>1 \<IN> e\<^isub>2 | \<CASE> e\<^isub>1 \<OF>"}$\;\overline{@{text "p \<rightarrow> e\<^isub>2"}}$ @{text "| e \<triangleright> \<gamma>"}\smallskip\\ |
|
426 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Patterns}\\ |
|
427 |
@{text "p"} & @{text "::="} & @{text "K"}$\;\overline{@{text "a:\<kappa>"}}\;\overline{@{text "c:\<iota>"}}\;\overline{@{text "x:\<sigma>"}}$\smallskip\\ |
|
428 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Constants}\\ |
|
429 |
& @{text C} & coercion constants\\ |
|
430 |
& @{text T} & value type constructors\\ |
|
431 |
& @{text "S\<^isub>n"} & n-ary type functions (which need to be fully applied)\\ |
|
432 |
& @{text K} & data constructors\smallskip\\ |
|
433 |
\multicolumn{3}{@ {}l}{Variables}\\ |
|
434 |
& @{text a} & type variables\\ |
|
435 |
& @{text c} & coercion variables\\ |
|
436 |
& @{text x} & term variables\\ |
|
437 |
\end{tabular} |
|
438 |
\end{center} |
|
439 |
\end{boxedminipage} |
|
440 |
\caption{The System @{text "F\<^isub>C"} |
|
441 |
\cite{CoreHaskell}, also often referred to as \emph{Core-Haskell}. In this |
|
442 |
version of @{text "F\<^isub>C"} we made a modification by separating the |
|
443 |
grammars for type kinds and coercion kinds, as well as for types and coercion |
|
444 |
types. For this paper the interesting term-constructor is @{text "\<CASE>"}, |
|
3041
119b9f7e34c0
added comments from Andrei
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
3039
diff
changeset
|
445 |
which binds multiple type-, coercion- and term-variables (the overlines stand for lists).\label{corehas}} |
2991 | 446 |
\end{figure} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
447 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
448 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
449 |
section {* A Short Review of the Nominal Logic Work *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
450 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
451 |
text {* |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
452 |
At its core, Nominal Isabelle is an adaption of the nominal logic work by |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
453 |
Pitts \cite{Pitts03}. This adaptation for Isabelle/HOL is described in |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
454 |
\cite{HuffmanUrban10} (including proofs). We shall briefly review this work |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
455 |
to aid the description of what follows. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
456 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
457 |
Two central notions in the nominal logic work are sorted atoms and |
3001 | 458 |
sort-respecting permutations of atoms. We will use the letters @{text "a, b, |
3002 | 459 |
c, \<dots>"} to stand for atoms and @{text "\<pi>, \<pi>\<^isub>1, \<dots>"} to stand for permutations, |
3001 | 460 |
which in Nominal Isabelle have type @{typ perm}. The purpose of atoms is to |
461 |
represent variables, be they bound or free. The sorts of atoms can be used |
|
462 |
to represent different kinds of variables, such as the term-, coercion- and |
|
463 |
type-variables in Core-Haskell. It is assumed that there is an infinite |
|
464 |
supply of atoms for each sort. In the interest of brevity, we shall restrict |
|
465 |
ourselves in what follows to only one sort of atoms. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
466 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
467 |
Permutations are bijective functions from atoms to atoms that are |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
468 |
the identity everywhere except on a finite number of atoms. There is a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
469 |
two-place permutation operation written |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
470 |
@{text "_ \<bullet> _ :: perm \<Rightarrow> \<beta> \<Rightarrow> \<beta>"} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
471 |
where the generic type @{text "\<beta>"} is the type of the object |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
472 |
over which the permutation |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
473 |
acts. In Nominal Isabelle, the identity permutation is written as @{term "0::perm"}, |
3000 | 474 |
the composition of two permutations @{term "\<pi>\<^isub>1"} and @{term "\<pi>\<^isub>2"} as \mbox{@{term "\<pi>\<^isub>1 + \<pi>\<^isub>2"}}, |
475 |
and the inverse permutation of @{term "\<pi>"} as @{text "- \<pi>"}. The permutation |
|
3002 | 476 |
operation is defined over Isabelle/HOL's type-hierarchy \cite{HuffmanUrban10}; |
3011 | 477 |
for example permutations acting on atoms, products, lists, permutations, sets, |
478 |
functions and booleans are given by: |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
479 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
480 |
\begin{equation}\label{permute} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
481 |
\mbox{\begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {\hspace{10mm}}c@ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
482 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}} |
3011 | 483 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> a \<equiv> \<pi> a"}\\ |
3000 | 484 |
@{thm permute_prod.simps[where p="\<pi>", no_vars, THEN eq_reflection]}\\[2mm] |
485 |
@{thm permute_list.simps(1)[where p="\<pi>", no_vars, THEN eq_reflection]}\\ |
|
486 |
@{thm permute_list.simps(2)[where p="\<pi>", no_vars, THEN eq_reflection]}\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
487 |
\end{tabular} & |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
488 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}} |
3011 | 489 |
@{thm permute_perm_def[where p="\<pi>" and q="\<pi>'", no_vars, THEN eq_reflection]}\\ |
3000 | 490 |
@{thm permute_set_eq[where p="\<pi>", no_vars, THEN eq_reflection]}\\ |
491 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> f \<equiv> \<lambda>x. \<pi> \<bullet> (f (- \<pi> \<bullet> x))"}\\ |
|
492 |
@{thm permute_bool_def[where p="\<pi>", no_vars, THEN eq_reflection]} |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
493 |
\end{tabular} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
494 |
\end{tabular}} |
3000 | 495 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
496 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
497 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
498 |
Concrete permutations in Nominal Isabelle are built up from swappings, |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
499 |
written as \mbox{@{text "(a b)"}}, which are permutations that behave |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
500 |
as follows: |
2991 | 501 |
|
3000 | 502 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
503 |
@{text "(a b) = \<lambda>c. if a = c then b else if b = c then a else c"} |
3000 | 504 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
505 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
506 |
The most original aspect of the nominal logic work of Pitts is a general |
3023 | 507 |
definition for the notion of the `set of free variables of an object @{text |
508 |
"x"}'. This notion, written @{term "supp x"}, is general in the sense that |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
509 |
it applies not only to lambda-terms (alpha-equated or not), but also to lists, |
3008 | 510 |
products, sets and even functions. Its definition depends only on the |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
511 |
permutation operation and on the notion of equality defined for the type of |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
512 |
@{text x}, namely: |
2991 | 513 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
514 |
\begin{equation}\label{suppdef} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
515 |
@{thm supp_def[no_vars, THEN eq_reflection]} |
3001 | 516 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
517 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
518 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
519 |
There is also the derived notion for when an atom @{text a} is \emph{fresh} |
3000 | 520 |
for an @{text x}, defined as |
521 |
||
522 |
\[ |
|
523 |
@{thm fresh_def[no_vars]} |
|
524 |
\]\smallskip |
|
525 |
||
526 |
\noindent |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
527 |
We use for sets of atoms the abbreviation |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
528 |
@{thm (lhs) fresh_star_def[no_vars]}, defined as |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
529 |
@{thm (rhs) fresh_star_def[no_vars]}. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
530 |
A striking consequence of these definitions is that we can prove |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
531 |
without knowing anything about the structure of @{term x} that |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
532 |
swapping two fresh atoms, say @{text a} and @{text b}, leaves |
3000 | 533 |
@{text x} unchanged, namely |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
534 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
535 |
\begin{prop}\label{swapfreshfresh} |
3000 | 536 |
If @{thm (prem 1) swap_fresh_fresh[no_vars]} and @{thm (prem 2) swap_fresh_fresh[no_vars]} |
3001 | 537 |
then @{thm (concl) swap_fresh_fresh[no_vars]}. |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
538 |
\end{prop} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
539 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
540 |
While often the support of an object can be relatively easily |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
541 |
described, for example for atoms, products, lists, function applications, |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
542 |
booleans and permutations as follows |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
543 |
|
3004 | 544 |
\begin{equation}\label{supps}\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
545 |
\begin{tabular}{c@ {\hspace{10mm}}c} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
546 |
\begin{tabular}{rcl} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
547 |
@{term "supp a"} & $=$ & @{term "{a}"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
548 |
@{term "supp (x, y)"} & $=$ & @{term "supp x \<union> supp y"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
549 |
@{term "supp []"} & $=$ & @{term "{}"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
550 |
@{term "supp (x#xs)"} & $=$ & @{term "supp x \<union> supp xs"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
551 |
\end{tabular} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
552 |
& |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
553 |
\begin{tabular}{rcl} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
554 |
@{text "supp (f x)"} & @{text "\<subseteq>"} & @{term "supp f \<union> supp x"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
555 |
@{term "supp b"} & $=$ & @{term "{}"}\\ |
3000 | 556 |
@{term "supp \<pi>"} & $=$ & @{term "{a. \<pi> \<bullet> a \<noteq> a}"} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
557 |
\end{tabular} |
3000 | 558 |
\end{tabular}} |
3004 | 559 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
560 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
561 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
562 |
in some cases it can be difficult to characterise the support precisely, and |
3000 | 563 |
only an approximation can be established (as for function applications |
564 |
above). Reasoning about such approximations can be simplified with the |
|
565 |
notion \emph{supports}, defined as follows: |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
566 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
567 |
\begin{defi} |
3001 | 568 |
A set @{text S} \emph{supports} @{text x}, if for all atoms @{text a} and @{text b} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
569 |
not in @{text S} we have @{term "(a \<rightleftharpoons> b) \<bullet> x = x"}. |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
570 |
\end{defi} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
571 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
572 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
573 |
The main point of @{text supports} is that we can establish the following |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
574 |
two properties. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
575 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
576 |
\begin{prop}\label{supportsprop} |
3001 | 577 |
Given a set @{text "as"} of atoms.\\ |
578 |
{\it (i)} If @{thm (prem 1) supp_is_subset[where S="as", no_vars]} |
|
579 |
and @{thm (prem 2) supp_is_subset[where S="as", no_vars]} then |
|
580 |
@{thm (concl) supp_is_subset[where S="as", no_vars]}.\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
581 |
{\it (ii)} @{thm supp_supports[no_vars]}. |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
582 |
\end{prop} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
583 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
584 |
Another important notion in the nominal logic work is \emph{equivariance}. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
585 |
For a function @{text f}, say of type @{text "\<alpha> \<Rightarrow> \<beta>"}, to be equivariant |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
586 |
it is required that every permutation leaves @{text f} unchanged, that is |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
587 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
588 |
\begin{equation}\label{equivariancedef} |
3001 | 589 |
@{term "\<forall>\<pi>. \<pi> \<bullet> f = f"} |
590 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
591 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
592 |
\noindent or equivalently that a permutation applied to the application |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
593 |
@{text "f x"} can be moved to the argument @{text x}. That means for equivariant |
3001 | 594 |
functions @{text f}, we have for all permutations @{text "\<pi>"}: |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
595 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
596 |
\begin{equation}\label{equivariance} |
3001 | 597 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> f = f"} \;\;\;\;\textit{if and only if}\;\;\;\; |
3003 | 598 |
@{text "\<forall>x. \<pi> \<bullet> (f x) = f (\<pi> \<bullet> x)"} |
3001 | 599 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
600 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
601 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
602 |
From property \eqref{equivariancedef} and the definition of @{text supp}, we |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
603 |
can easily deduce that equivariant functions have empty support. There is |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
604 |
also a similar notion for equivariant relations, say @{text R}, namely the property |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
605 |
that |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
606 |
|
3025 | 607 |
\[ |
3001 | 608 |
@{text "x R y"} \;\;\textit{implies}\;\; @{text "(\<pi> \<bullet> x) R (\<pi> \<bullet> y)"} |
3025 | 609 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
610 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
611 |
Using freshness, the nominal logic work provides us with general means for renaming |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
612 |
binders. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
613 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
614 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
615 |
While in the older version of Nominal Isabelle, we used extensively |
3001 | 616 |
Property~\ref{swapfreshfresh} to rename single binders, this property |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
617 |
proved too unwieldy for dealing with multiple binders. For such binders the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
618 |
following generalisations turned out to be easier to use. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
619 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
620 |
\begin{prop}\label{supppermeq} |
3001 | 621 |
@{thm[mode=IfThen] supp_perm_eq[where p="\<pi>", no_vars]} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
622 |
\end{prop} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
623 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
624 |
\begin{prop}\label{avoiding} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
625 |
For a finite set @{text as} and a finitely supported @{text x} with |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
626 |
@{term "as \<sharp>* x"} and also a finitely supported @{text c}, there |
3001 | 627 |
exists a permutation @{text "\<pi>"} such that @{term "(\<pi> \<bullet> as) \<sharp>* c"} and |
628 |
@{term "supp x \<sharp>* \<pi>"}. |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
629 |
\end{prop} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
630 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
631 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
632 |
The idea behind the second property is that given a finite set @{text as} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
633 |
of binders (being bound, or fresh, in @{text x} is ensured by the |
3001 | 634 |
assumption @{term "as \<sharp>* x"}), then there exists a permutation @{text "\<pi>"} such that |
635 |
the renamed binders @{term "\<pi> \<bullet> as"} avoid @{text c} (which can be arbitrarily chosen |
|
636 |
as long as it is finitely supported) and also @{text "\<pi>"} does not affect anything |
|
637 |
in the support of @{text x} (that is @{term "supp x \<sharp>* \<pi>"}). The last |
|
3023 | 638 |
fact and Property~\ref{supppermeq} allow us to `rename' just the binders |
3011 | 639 |
@{text as} in @{text x}, because @{term "\<pi> \<bullet> x = x"}. |
640 |
||
641 |
Note that @{term "supp x \<sharp>* \<pi>"} |
|
3004 | 642 |
is equivalent with @{term "supp \<pi> \<sharp>* x"}, which means we could also formulate |
3021 | 643 |
Propositions \ref{supppermeq} and \ref{avoiding} in the other `direction'; however the |
3004 | 644 |
reasoning infrastructure of Nominal Isabelle is set up so that it provides more |
3011 | 645 |
automation for the formulation given above. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
646 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
647 |
Most properties given in this section are described in detail in \cite{HuffmanUrban10} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
648 |
and all are formalised in Isabelle/HOL. In the next sections we will make |
3001 | 649 |
use of these properties in order to define alpha-equivalence in |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
650 |
the presence of multiple binders. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
651 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
652 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
653 |
|
3016 | 654 |
section {* Abstractions\label{sec:binders} *} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
655 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
656 |
text {* |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
657 |
In Nominal Isabelle, the user is expected to write down a specification of a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
658 |
term-calculus and then a reasoning infrastructure is automatically derived |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
659 |
from this specification (remember that Nominal Isabelle is a definitional |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
660 |
extension of Isabelle/HOL, which does not introduce any new axioms). |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
661 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
662 |
In order to keep our work with deriving the reasoning infrastructure |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
663 |
manageable, we will wherever possible state definitions and perform proofs |
3023 | 664 |
on the `user-level' of Isabelle/HOL, as opposed to writing custom ML-code that |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
665 |
generates them anew for each specification. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
666 |
To that end, we will consider |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
667 |
first pairs @{text "(as, x)"} of type @{text "(atom set) \<times> \<beta>"}. These pairs |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
668 |
are intended to represent the abstraction, or binding, of the set of atoms @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
669 |
"as"} in the body @{text "x"}. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
670 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
671 |
The first question we have to answer is when two pairs @{text "(as, x)"} and |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
672 |
@{text "(bs, y)"} are alpha-equivalent? (For the moment we are interested in |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
673 |
the notion of alpha-equivalence that is \emph{not} preserved by adding |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
674 |
vacuous binders.) To answer this question, we identify four conditions: {\it (i)} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
675 |
given a free-atom function @{text "fa"} of type \mbox{@{text "\<beta> \<Rightarrow> atom |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
676 |
set"}}, then @{text x} and @{text y} need to have the same set of free |
3001 | 677 |
atoms; moreover there must be a permutation @{text \<pi>} such that {\it |
678 |
(ii)} @{text \<pi>} leaves the free atoms of @{text x} and @{text y} unchanged, but |
|
3023 | 679 |
{\it (iii)} `moves' their bound names so that we obtain modulo a relation, |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
680 |
say \mbox{@{text "_ R _"}}, two equivalent terms. We also require that {\it (iv)} |
3001 | 681 |
@{text \<pi>} makes the sets of abstracted atoms @{text as} and @{text bs} equal. The |
3010 | 682 |
requirements {\it (i)} to {\it (iv)} can be stated formally as: |
3001 | 683 |
|
684 |
\begin{defi}[Alpha-Equivalence for Set-Bindings]\label{alphaset}\mbox{}\\ |
|
685 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {\hspace{10mm}}l@ {\hspace{5mm}}rl} |
|
3006 | 686 |
@{term "alpha_set_ex (as, x) R fa (bs, y)"}\hspace{2mm}@{text "\<equiv>"} & |
687 |
\multicolumn{2}{@ {}l}{if there exists a @{text "\<pi>"} such that:}\\ |
|
3001 | 688 |
& \mbox{\it (i)} & @{term "fa(x) - as = fa(y) - bs"}\\ |
689 |
& \mbox{\it (ii)} & @{term "(fa(x) - as) \<sharp>* \<pi>"}\\ |
|
690 |
& \mbox{\it (iii)} & @{text "(\<pi> \<bullet> x) R y"} \\ |
|
691 |
& \mbox{\it (iv)} & @{term "(\<pi> \<bullet> as) = bs"} \\ |
|
692 |
\end{tabular} |
|
693 |
\end{defi} |
|
694 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
695 |
\noindent |
3006 | 696 |
Note that the relation is |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
697 |
dependent on a free-atom function @{text "fa"} and a relation @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
698 |
"R"}. The reason for this extra generality is that we will use |
3025 | 699 |
$\approx_{\,\textit{set}}^{\textit{R}, \textit{fa}}$ for both raw terms and |
3013 | 700 |
alpha-equated terms. In |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
701 |
the latter case, @{text R} will be replaced by equality @{text "="} and we |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
702 |
will prove that @{text "fa"} is equal to @{text "supp"}. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
703 |
|
3001 | 704 |
Definition \ref{alphaset} does not make any distinction between the |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
705 |
order of abstracted atoms. If we want this, then we can define alpha-equivalence |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
706 |
for pairs of the form \mbox{@{text "(as, x)"}} with type @{text "(atom list) \<times> \<beta>"} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
707 |
as follows |
3001 | 708 |
|
709 |
\begin{defi}[Alpha-Equivalence for List-Bindings]\label{alphalist}\mbox{}\\ |
|
710 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {\hspace{10mm}}l@ {\hspace{5mm}}rl} |
|
3006 | 711 |
@{term "alpha_lst_ex (as, x) R fa (bs, y)"}\hspace{2mm}@{text "\<equiv>"} & |
712 |
\multicolumn{2}{@ {}l}{if there exists a @{text "\<pi>"} such that:}\\ |
|
3001 | 713 |
& \mbox{\it (i)} & @{term "fa(x) - (set as) = fa(y) - (set bs)"}\\ |
714 |
& \mbox{\it (ii)} & @{term "(fa(x) - set as) \<sharp>* \<pi>"}\\ |
|
715 |
& \mbox{\it (iii)} & @{text "(\<pi> \<bullet> x) R y"}\\ |
|
716 |
& \mbox{\it (iv)} & @{term "(\<pi> \<bullet> as) = bs"}\\ |
|
717 |
\end{tabular} |
|
718 |
\end{defi} |
|
719 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
720 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
721 |
where @{term set} is the function that coerces a list of atoms into a set of atoms. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
722 |
Now the last clause ensures that the order of the binders matters (since @{text as} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
723 |
and @{text bs} are lists of atoms). |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
724 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
725 |
If we do not want to make any difference between the order of binders \emph{and} |
3021 | 726 |
also allow vacuous binders, that means according to Pitts~\cite{Pitts04} |
727 |
\emph{restrict} names, then we keep sets of binders, but drop |
|
3001 | 728 |
condition {\it (iv)} in Definition~\ref{alphaset}: |
729 |
||
730 |
\begin{defi}[Alpha-Equivalence for Set+-Bindings]\label{alphares}\mbox{}\\ |
|
731 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {\hspace{10mm}}l@ {\hspace{5mm}}rl} |
|
3006 | 732 |
@{term "alpha_res_ex (as, x) R fa (bs, y)"}\hspace{2mm}@{text "\<equiv>"} & |
733 |
\multicolumn{2}{@ {}l}{if there exists a @{text "\<pi>"} such that:}\\ |
|
3001 | 734 |
& \mbox{\it (i)} & @{term "fa(x) - as = fa(y) - bs"}\\ |
735 |
& \mbox{\it (ii)} & @{term "(fa(x) - as) \<sharp>* \<pi>"}\\ |
|
736 |
& \mbox{\it (iii)} & @{text "(\<pi> \<bullet> x) R y"}\\ |
|
737 |
\end{tabular} |
|
738 |
\end{defi} |
|
739 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
740 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
741 |
It might be useful to consider first some examples how these definitions |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
742 |
of alpha-equivalence pan out in practice. For this consider the case of |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
743 |
abstracting a set of atoms over types (as in type-schemes). We set |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
744 |
@{text R} to be the usual equality @{text "="} and for @{text "fa(T)"} we |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
745 |
define |
3001 | 746 |
|
747 |
\[ |
|
3009 | 748 |
@{text "fa(x) \<equiv> {x}"} \hspace{5mm} @{text "fa(T\<^isub>1 \<rightarrow> T\<^isub>2) \<equiv> fa(T\<^isub>1) \<union> fa(T\<^isub>2)"} |
3001 | 749 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
750 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
751 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
752 |
Now recall the examples shown in \eqref{ex1} and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
753 |
\eqref{ex3}. It can be easily checked that @{text "({x, y}, x \<rightarrow> y)"} and |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
754 |
@{text "({y, x}, y \<rightarrow> x)"} are alpha-equivalent according to |
3001 | 755 |
$\approx_{\,\textit{set}}$ and $\approx_{\,\textit{set+}}$ by taking @{text "\<pi>"} to |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
756 |
be the swapping @{term "(x \<rightleftharpoons> y)"}. In case of @{text "x \<noteq> y"}, then @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
757 |
"([x, y], x \<rightarrow> y)"} $\not\approx_{\,\textit{list}}$ @{text "([y, x], x \<rightarrow> y)"} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
758 |
since there is no permutation that makes the lists @{text "[x, y]"} and |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
759 |
@{text "[y, x]"} equal, and also leaves the type \mbox{@{text "x \<rightarrow> y"}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
760 |
unchanged. Another example is @{text "({x}, x)"} $\approx_{\,\textit{set+}}$ |
3001 | 761 |
@{text "({x, y}, x)"} which holds by taking @{text "\<pi>"} to be the identity |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
762 |
permutation. However, if @{text "x \<noteq> y"}, then @{text "({x}, x)"} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
763 |
$\not\approx_{\,\textit{set}}$ @{text "({x, y}, x)"} since there is no |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
764 |
permutation that makes the sets @{text "{x}"} and @{text "{x, y}"} equal |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
765 |
(similarly for $\approx_{\,\textit{list}}$). It can also relatively easily be |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
766 |
shown that all three notions of alpha-equivalence coincide, if we only |
3037 | 767 |
abstract a single atom. In this case they also agree with the alpha-equivalence |
3038 | 768 |
used in older versions of Nominal Isabelle \cite{Urban08}.\footnote{We omit a |
769 |
proof of this fact since the details are hairy and not really important for the |
|
770 |
purpose of this paper.} |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
771 |
|
3021 | 772 |
In the rest of this section we are going to show that the alpha-equivalences |
3025 | 773 |
really lead to abstractions where some atoms are bound (or more precisely |
3021 | 774 |
removed from the support). For this we will consider three abstraction |
775 |
types that are quotients of the relations |
|
3001 | 776 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
777 |
\begin{equation} |
3002 | 778 |
\begin{array}{r} |
3011 | 779 |
@{term "alpha_set_ex (as, x) equal supp (bs, y)"}\smallskip\\ |
780 |
@{term "alpha_res_ex (as, x) equal supp (bs, y)"}\smallskip\\ |
|
781 |
@{term "alpha_lst_ex (as, x) equal supp (bs, y)"}\\ |
|
3001 | 782 |
\end{array} |
3002 | 783 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
784 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
785 |
\noindent |
3007 | 786 |
Note that in these relation we replaced the free-atom function @{text "fa"} |
787 |
with @{term "supp"} and the relation @{text R} with equality. We can show |
|
3013 | 788 |
the following two properties: |
3007 | 789 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
790 |
\begin{lem}\label{alphaeq} |
3011 | 791 |
The relations $\approx_{\,\textit{set}}^{=, \textit{supp}}$, |
792 |
$\approx_{\,\textit{set+}}^{=, \textit{supp}}$ |
|
793 |
and $\approx_{\,\textit{list}}^{=, \textit{supp}}$ are |
|
794 |
equivalence relations and equivariant. |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
795 |
\end{lem} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
796 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
797 |
\begin{proof} |
3001 | 798 |
Reflexivity is by taking @{text "\<pi>"} to be @{text "0"}. For symmetry we have |
3011 | 799 |
a permutation @{text "\<pi>"} and for the proof obligation take @{term "- |
800 |
\<pi>"}. In case of transitivity, we have two permutations @{text "\<pi>\<^isub>1"} |
|
801 |
and @{text "\<pi>\<^isub>2"}, and for the proof obligation use @{text |
|
802 |
"\<pi>\<^isub>1 + \<pi>\<^isub>2"}. Equivariance means @{term "alpha_set_ex (\<pi> \<bullet> as, |
|
803 |
\<pi> \<bullet> x) equal supp (\<pi> \<bullet> bs, \<pi> \<bullet> y)"} holds provided \mbox{@{term |
|
3013 | 804 |
"alpha_set_ex (as, x) equal supp(bs, y)"}} holds. From the assumption we |
805 |
have a permutation @{text "\<pi>'"} and for the proof obligation use @{text "\<pi> \<bullet> |
|
806 |
\<pi>'"}. To show then equivariance, we need to `pull out' the permutations, |
|
807 |
which is possible since all operators, namely as @{text "#\<^sup>*, -, =, \<bullet>, |
|
808 |
set"} and @{text "supp"}, are equivariant (see |
|
809 |
\cite{HuffmanUrban10}). Finally, we apply the permutation operation on |
|
810 |
booleans. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
811 |
\end{proof} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
812 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
813 |
\noindent |
3008 | 814 |
Recall the picture shown in \eqref{picture} about new types in HOL. |
815 |
The lemma above allows us to use our quotient package for introducing |
|
3002 | 816 |
new types @{text "\<beta> abs\<^bsub>set\<^esub>"}, @{text "\<beta> abs\<^bsub>set+\<^esub>"} and @{text "\<beta> abs\<^bsub>list\<^esub>"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
817 |
representing alpha-equivalence classes of pairs of type |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
818 |
@{text "(atom set) \<times> \<beta>"} (in the first two cases) and of type @{text "(atom list) \<times> \<beta>"} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
819 |
(in the third case). |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
820 |
The elements in these types will be, respectively, written as |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
821 |
|
3002 | 822 |
\[ |
823 |
@{term "Abs_set as x"} \hspace{10mm} |
|
824 |
@{term "Abs_res as x"} \hspace{10mm} |
|
825 |
@{term "Abs_lst as x"} |
|
826 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
827 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
828 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
829 |
indicating that a set (or list) of atoms @{text as} is abstracted in @{text x}. We will |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
830 |
call the types \emph{abstraction types} and their elements |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
831 |
\emph{abstractions}. The important property we need to derive is the support of |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
832 |
abstractions, namely: |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
833 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
834 |
\begin{thm}[Support of Abstractions]\label{suppabs} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
835 |
Assuming @{text x} has finite support, then |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
836 |
|
3002 | 837 |
\[ |
838 |
\begin{array}{l@ {\;=\;}l} |
|
839 |
@{thm (lhs) supp_Abs(1)[no_vars]} & @{thm (rhs) supp_Abs(1)[no_vars]}\\ |
|
840 |
@{thm (lhs) supp_Abs(2)[no_vars]} & @{thm (rhs) supp_Abs(2)[no_vars]}\\ |
|
841 |
@{thm (lhs) supp_Abs(3)[where bs="as", no_vars]} & |
|
842 |
@{thm (rhs) supp_Abs(3)[where bs="as", no_vars]}\\ |
|
843 |
\end{array} |
|
844 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
845 |
\end{thm} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
846 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
847 |
\noindent |
3006 | 848 |
In effect, this theorem states that the atoms @{text "as"} are bound in the |
3025 | 849 |
abstraction. As stated earlier, this can be seen as a litmus test that our |
3006 | 850 |
Definitions \ref{alphaset}, \ref{alphalist} and \ref{alphares} capture the |
851 |
idea of alpha-equivalence relations. Below we will give the proof for the |
|
852 |
first equation of Theorem \ref{suppabs}. The others follow by similar |
|
853 |
arguments. By definition of the abstraction type @{text |
|
854 |
"abs\<^bsub>set\<^esub>"} we have |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
855 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
856 |
\begin{equation}\label{abseqiff} |
3004 | 857 |
@{thm (lhs) Abs_eq_iff(1)[where bs="as" and cs="bs", no_vars]} \;\;\;\text{if and only if}\;\;\; |
3006 | 858 |
@{term "alpha_set_ex (as, x) equal supp (bs, y)"} |
3002 | 859 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
860 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
861 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
862 |
and also |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
863 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
864 |
\begin{equation}\label{absperm} |
3002 | 865 |
@{thm permute_Abs(1)[where p="\<pi>", no_vars]} |
866 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
867 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
868 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
869 |
The second fact derives from the definition of permutations acting on pairs |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
870 |
\eqref{permute} and alpha-equivalence being equivariant |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
871 |
(see Lemma~\ref{alphaeq}). With these two facts at our disposal, we can show |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
872 |
the following lemma about swapping two atoms in an abstraction. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
873 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
874 |
\begin{lem} |
3004 | 875 |
If @{thm (prem 1) Abs_swap1(1)[where bs="as", no_vars]} and |
876 |
@{thm (prem 2) Abs_swap1(1)[where bs="as", no_vars]} then |
|
877 |
@{thm (concl) Abs_swap1(1)[where bs="as", no_vars]} |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
878 |
\end{lem} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
879 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
880 |
\begin{proof} |
3025 | 881 |
If @{term "a = b"} the lemma is immediate, since @{term "(a \<rightleftharpoons> b)"} is then |
882 |
the identity permutation. |
|
3021 | 883 |
Also in the other case the lemma is straightforward using \eqref{abseqiff} |
884 |
and observing that the assumptions give us @{term "(a \<rightleftharpoons> b) \<bullet> (supp x - as) = |
|
3025 | 885 |
(supp x - as)"}. We therefore can use the swapping @{term "(a \<rightleftharpoons> b)"} as |
886 |
the permutation for the proof obligation. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
887 |
\end{proof} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
888 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
889 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
890 |
Assuming that @{text "x"} has finite support, this lemma together |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
891 |
with \eqref{absperm} allows us to show |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
892 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
893 |
\begin{equation}\label{halfone} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
894 |
@{thm Abs_supports(1)[no_vars]} |
3004 | 895 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
896 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
897 |
\noindent |
3023 | 898 |
which by Property~\ref{supportsprop} gives us `one half' of |
899 |
Theorem~\ref{suppabs}. The `other half' is a bit more involved. To establish |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
900 |
it, we use a trick from \cite{Pitts04} and first define an auxiliary |
3004 | 901 |
function @{text aux}, taking an abstraction as argument |
902 |
||
903 |
\[ |
|
904 |
@{thm supp_set.simps[THEN eq_reflection, no_vars]} |
|
905 |
\]\smallskip |
|
906 |
||
907 |
\noindent |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
908 |
Using the second equation in \eqref{equivariance}, we can show that |
3004 | 909 |
@{text "aux"} is equivariant (since @{term "\<pi> \<bullet> (supp x - as) = (supp (\<pi> \<bullet> x)) - (\<pi> \<bullet> as)"}) |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
910 |
and therefore has empty support. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
911 |
This in turn means |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
912 |
|
3004 | 913 |
\[ |
914 |
@{term "supp (supp_set (Abs_set as x)) \<subseteq> supp (Abs_set as x)"} |
|
915 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
916 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
917 |
\noindent |
3006 | 918 |
using the fact about the support of function applications in \eqref{supps}. Assuming |
3004 | 919 |
@{term "supp x - as"} is a finite set, we further obtain |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
920 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
921 |
\begin{equation}\label{halftwo} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
922 |
@{thm (concl) Abs_supp_subset1(1)[no_vars]} |
3004 | 923 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
924 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
925 |
\noindent |
3006 | 926 |
This is because for every finite sets of atoms, say @{text "bs"}, we have |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
927 |
@{thm (concl) supp_finite_atom_set[where S="bs", no_vars]}. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
928 |
Finally, taking \eqref{halfone} and \eqref{halftwo} together establishes |
3025 | 929 |
the first equation of Theorem~\ref{suppabs}. The others are similar. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
930 |
|
3021 | 931 |
Recall the definition of support given in \eqref{suppdef}, and note the difference between |
3025 | 932 |
the support of a raw pair and an abstraction |
3010 | 933 |
|
934 |
\[ |
|
935 |
@{term "supp (as, x) = supp as \<union> supp x"}\hspace{15mm} |
|
936 |
@{term "supp (Abs_set as x) = supp x - as"} |
|
937 |
\]\smallskip |
|
938 |
||
939 |
\noindent |
|
3013 | 940 |
While the permutation operations behave in both cases the same (a permutation |
3010 | 941 |
is just moved to the arguments), the notion of equality is different for pairs and |
3021 | 942 |
abstractions. Therefore we have different supports. In case of abstractions, |
3023 | 943 |
we have established in Theorem~\ref{suppabs} that bound atoms are removed from |
944 |
the support of the abstractions' bodies. |
|
3010 | 945 |
|
3004 | 946 |
The method of first considering abstractions of the form @{term "Abs_set as |
947 |
x"} etc is motivated by the fact that we can conveniently establish at the |
|
948 |
Isabelle/HOL level properties about them. It would be extremely laborious |
|
949 |
to write custom ML-code that derives automatically such properties for every |
|
950 |
term-constructor that binds some atoms. Also the generality of the |
|
951 |
definitions for alpha-equivalence will help us in the next sections. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
952 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
953 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
954 |
section {* Specifying General Bindings\label{sec:spec} *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
955 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
956 |
text {* |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
957 |
Our choice of syntax for specifications is influenced by the existing |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
958 |
datatype package of Isabelle/HOL \cite{Berghofer99} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
959 |
and by the syntax of the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
960 |
Ott-tool \cite{ott-jfp}. For us a specification of a term-calculus is a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
961 |
collection of (possibly mutual recursive) type declarations, say @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
962 |
"ty\<AL>\<^isub>1, \<dots>, ty\<AL>\<^isub>n"}, and an associated collection of |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
963 |
binding functions, say @{text "bn\<AL>\<^isub>1, \<dots>, bn\<AL>\<^isub>m"}. The |
3006 | 964 |
syntax in Nominal Isabelle for such specifications is schematically as follows: |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
965 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
966 |
\begin{equation}\label{scheme} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
967 |
\mbox{\begin{tabular}{@ {}p{2.5cm}l} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
968 |
type \mbox{declaration part} & |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
969 |
$\begin{cases} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
970 |
\mbox{\begin{tabular}{l} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
971 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype} @{text "ty\<AL>\<^isub>1 = \<dots>"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
972 |
\isacommand{and} @{text "ty\<AL>\<^isub>2 = \<dots>"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
973 |
\raisebox{2mm}{$\ldots$}\\[-2mm] |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
974 |
\isacommand{and} @{text "ty\<AL>\<^isub>n = \<dots>"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
975 |
\end{tabular}} |
3006 | 976 |
\end{cases}$\\[2mm] |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
977 |
binding \mbox{function part} & |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
978 |
$\begin{cases} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
979 |
\mbox{\begin{tabular}{l} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
980 |
\isacommand{binder} @{text "bn\<AL>\<^isub>1"} \isacommand{and} \ldots \isacommand{and} @{text "bn\<AL>\<^isub>m"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
981 |
\isacommand{where}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
982 |
\raisebox{2mm}{$\ldots$}\\[-2mm] |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
983 |
\end{tabular}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
984 |
\end{cases}$\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
985 |
\end{tabular}} |
3004 | 986 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
987 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
988 |
\noindent |
3004 | 989 |
Every type declaration @{text ty}$^\alpha_{1..n}$ consists of a collection |
990 |
of term-constructors, each of which comes with a list of labelled types that |
|
991 |
stand for the types of the arguments of the term-constructor. For example a |
|
992 |
term-constructor @{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha>"} might be specified with |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
993 |
|
3004 | 994 |
\[ |
3008 | 995 |
@{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha> label\<^isub>1::ty"}\mbox{$'_1$} @{text "\<dots> label\<^isub>l::ty"}\mbox{$'_l\;\;\;\;\;$} |
996 |
@{text "binding_clauses"} |
|
3004 | 997 |
\]\smallskip |
998 |
||
999 |
\noindent |
|
1000 |
whereby some of the @{text ty}$'_{1..l}$ (or their components) can be |
|
1001 |
contained in the collection of @{text ty}$^\alpha_{1..n}$ declared in |
|
1002 |
\eqref{scheme}. In this case we will call the corresponding argument a |
|
1003 |
\emph{recursive argument} of @{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha>"}. The types of such |
|
3023 | 1004 |
recursive arguments need to satisfy a `positivity' restriction, which |
3004 | 1005 |
ensures that the type has a set-theoretic semantics (see |
1006 |
\cite{Berghofer99}). The labels annotated on the types are optional. Their |
|
1007 |
purpose is to be used in the (possibly empty) list of \emph{binding |
|
1008 |
clauses}, which indicate the binders and their scope in a term-constructor. |
|
1009 |
They come in three \emph{modes}: |
|
1010 |
||
1011 |
||
1012 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
1013 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}} |
|
1014 |
\isacommand{binds} {\it binders} \isacommand{in} {\it bodies}\\ |
|
1015 |
\isacommand{binds (set)} {\it binders} \isacommand{in} {\it bodies}\\ |
|
1016 |
\isacommand{binds (set+)} {\it binders} \isacommand{in} {\it bodies} |
|
1017 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
1018 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1019 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1020 |
\noindent |
3004 | 1021 |
The first mode is for binding lists of atoms (the order of bound atoms |
1022 |
matters); the second is for sets of binders (the order does not matter, but |
|
1023 |
the cardinality does) and the last is for sets of binders (with vacuous |
|
1024 |
binders preserving alpha-equivalence). As indicated, the labels in the |
|
3023 | 1025 |
`\isacommand{in}-part' of a binding clause will be called \emph{bodies}; |
1026 |
the `\isacommand{binds}-part' will be called \emph{binders}. In contrast to |
|
3004 | 1027 |
Ott, we allow multiple labels in binders and bodies. For example we allow |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1028 |
binding clauses of the form: |
3004 | 1029 |
|
1030 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1031 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}ll@ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1032 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>1 x::name y::name t::trm s::trm"} & |
3004 | 1033 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "x y"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t s"}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1034 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>2 x::name y::name t::trm s::trm"} & |
3004 | 1035 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "x y"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t"}, |
1036 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "x y"} \isacommand{in} @{text "s"}\\ |
|
1037 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
1038 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1039 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1040 |
\noindent |
3004 | 1041 |
Similarly for the other binding modes. Interestingly, in case of |
1042 |
\isacommand{binds (set)} and \isacommand{binds (set+)} the binding clauses |
|
1043 |
above will make a difference to the semantics of the specifications (the |
|
1044 |
corresponding alpha-equivalence will differ). We will show this later with |
|
1045 |
an example. |
|
1046 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1047 |
|
3004 | 1048 |
There are also some restrictions we need to impose on our binding clauses in |
3018 | 1049 |
comparison to Ott. The main idea behind these restrictions is |
3017 | 1050 |
that we obtain a notion of alpha-equivalence where it is ensured |
3004 | 1051 |
that within a given scope an atom occurrence cannot be both bound and free |
1052 |
at the same time. The first restriction is that a body can only occur in |
|
3006 | 1053 |
\emph{one} binding clause of a term constructor. So for example |
1054 |
||
1055 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
1056 |
@{text "Foo x::name y::name t::trm"}\hspace{3mm} |
|
1057 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "x"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t"}, |
|
1058 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "y"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t"}} |
|
1059 |
\]\smallskip |
|
1060 |
||
1061 |
\noindent |
|
1062 |
is not allowed. This ensures that the bound atoms of a body cannot be free |
|
1063 |
at the same time by specifying an alternative binder for the same body. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1064 |
|
3004 | 1065 |
For binders we distinguish between \emph{shallow} and \emph{deep} binders. |
1066 |
Shallow binders are just labels. The restriction we need to impose on them |
|
1067 |
is that in case of \isacommand{binds (set)} and \isacommand{binds (set+)} the |
|
1068 |
labels must either refer to atom types or to sets of atom types; in case of |
|
3010 | 1069 |
\isacommand{binds} the labels must refer to atom types or to lists of atom |
3004 | 1070 |
types. Two examples for the use of shallow binders are the specification of |
1071 |
lambda-terms, where a single name is bound, and type-schemes, where a finite |
|
1072 |
set of names is bound: |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1073 |
|
3004 | 1074 |
\[\mbox{ |
3010 | 1075 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {\hspace{8mm}}c@ {}} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1076 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1077 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype} @{text lam} $=$\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1078 |
\hspace{2mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{text "Var name"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1079 |
\hspace{2mm}$\mid$~@{text "App lam lam"}\\ |
3004 | 1080 |
\hspace{2mm}$\mid$~@{text "Lam x::name t::lam"}\hspace{3mm}% |
1081 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text x} \isacommand{in} @{text t}\\ |
|
3010 | 1082 |
\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1083 |
\end{tabular} & |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1084 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1085 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype}~@{text ty} $=$\\ |
3010 | 1086 |
\hspace{2mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{text "TVar name"}\\ |
1087 |
\hspace{2mm}$\mid$~@{text "TFun ty ty"}\\ |
|
1088 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "tsc ="}\\ |
|
1089 |
\hspace{2mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{text "TAll xs::(name fset) T::ty"}\hspace{3mm}% |
|
3004 | 1090 |
\isacommand{binds (set+)} @{text xs} \isacommand{in} @{text T}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1091 |
\end{tabular} |
3004 | 1092 |
\end{tabular}} |
1093 |
\]\smallskip |
|
1094 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1095 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1096 |
\noindent |
3018 | 1097 |
In these specifications @{text "name"} refers to a (concrete) atom type, and @{text |
3006 | 1098 |
"fset"} to the type of finite sets. Note that for @{text Lam} it does not |
3004 | 1099 |
matter which binding mode we use. The reason is that we bind only a single |
3009 | 1100 |
@{text name}, in which case all three binding modes coincide. However, having |
1101 |
\isacommand{binds (set)} or just \isacommand{binds} |
|
3004 | 1102 |
in the second case makes a difference to the semantics of the specification |
1103 |
(which we will define in the next section). |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1104 |
|
3023 | 1105 |
A \emph{deep} binder uses an auxiliary binding function that `picks' out |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1106 |
the atoms in one argument of the term-constructor, which can be bound in |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1107 |
other arguments and also in the same argument (we will call such binders |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1108 |
\emph{recursive}, see below). The binding functions are |
3004 | 1109 |
expected to return either a set of atoms (for \isacommand{binds (set)} and |
1110 |
\isacommand{binds (set+)}) or a list of atoms (for \isacommand{binds}). They need |
|
1111 |
to be defined by recursion over the corresponding type; the equations |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1112 |
must be given in the binding function part of the scheme shown in |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1113 |
\eqref{scheme}. For example a term-calculus containing @{text "Let"}s with |
3011 | 1114 |
tuple patterns may be specified as: |
3004 | 1115 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1116 |
\begin{equation}\label{letpat} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1117 |
\mbox{% |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1118 |
\begin{tabular}{l} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1119 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype} @{text trm} $=$\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1120 |
\hspace{5mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{term "Var name"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1121 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{term "App trm trm"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1122 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "Lam x::name t::trm"} |
3004 | 1123 |
\;\;\isacommand{binds} @{text x} \isacommand{in} @{text t}\\ |
3018 | 1124 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "Let_pat p::pat trm t::trm"} |
3004 | 1125 |
\;\;\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn(p)"} \isacommand{in} @{text t}\\ |
1126 |
\isacommand{and} @{text pat} $=$\\ |
|
3029 | 1127 |
\hspace{5mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{text "PVar name"}\\ |
3004 | 1128 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "PTup pat pat"}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1129 |
\isacommand{binder}~@{text "bn::pat \<Rightarrow> atom list"}\\ |
3029 | 1130 |
\isacommand{where}~@{text "bn(PVar x) = [atom x]"}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1131 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "bn(PTup p\<^isub>1 p\<^isub>2) = bn(p\<^isub>1) @ bn(p\<^isub>2)"}\smallskip\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1132 |
\end{tabular}} |
3004 | 1133 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
1134 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1135 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1136 |
In this specification the function @{text "bn"} determines which atoms of |
3011 | 1137 |
the pattern @{text p} (fifth line) are bound in the argument @{text "t"}. Note that in the |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1138 |
second-last @{text bn}-clause the function @{text "atom"} coerces a name |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1139 |
into the generic atom type of Nominal Isabelle \cite{HuffmanUrban10}. This |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1140 |
allows us to treat binders of different atom type uniformly. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1141 |
|
3008 | 1142 |
For deep binders we allow binding clauses such as |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1143 |
|
3004 | 1144 |
\[\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1145 |
\begin{tabular}{ll} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1146 |
@{text "Bar p::pat t::trm"} & |
3004 | 1147 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn(p)"} \isacommand{in} @{text "p t"} \\ |
1148 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
1149 |
\]\smallskip |
|
1150 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1151 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1152 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1153 |
where the argument of the deep binder also occurs in the body. We call such |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1154 |
binders \emph{recursive}. To see the purpose of such recursive binders, |
3023 | 1155 |
compare `plain' @{text "Let"}s and @{text "Let_rec"}s in the following |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1156 |
specification: |
3004 | 1157 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1158 |
\begin{equation}\label{letrecs} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1159 |
\mbox{% |
3031 | 1160 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}l} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1161 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype}~@{text "trm ="}~\ldots\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1162 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "Let as::assn t::trm"} |
3031 | 1163 |
& \hspace{-19mm}\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn(as)"} \isacommand{in} @{text t}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1164 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "Let_rec as::assn t::trm"} |
3031 | 1165 |
& \hspace{-19mm}\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn(as)"} \isacommand{in} @{text "as t"}\\ |
3004 | 1166 |
\isacommand{and} @{text "assn"} $=$\\ |
1167 |
\hspace{5mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{text "ANil"}\\ |
|
1168 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "ACons name trm assn"}\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1169 |
\isacommand{binder} @{text "bn::assn \<Rightarrow> atom list"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1170 |
\isacommand{where}~@{text "bn(ANil) = []"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1171 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "bn(ACons a t as) = [atom a] @ bn(as)"}\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1172 |
\end{tabular}} |
3004 | 1173 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
1174 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1175 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1176 |
The difference is that with @{text Let} we only want to bind the atoms @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1177 |
"bn(as)"} in the term @{text t}, but with @{text "Let_rec"} we also want to bind the atoms |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1178 |
inside the assignment. This difference has consequences for the associated |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1179 |
notions of free-atoms and alpha-equivalence. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1180 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1181 |
To make sure that atoms bound by deep binders cannot be free at the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1182 |
same time, we cannot have more than one binding function for a deep binder. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1183 |
Consequently we exclude specifications such as |
3006 | 1184 |
|
1185 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1186 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {\hspace{2mm}}l@ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1187 |
@{text "Baz\<^isub>1 p::pat t::trm"} & |
3004 | 1188 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn\<^isub>1(p) bn\<^isub>2(p)"} \isacommand{in} @{text t}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1189 |
@{text "Baz\<^isub>2 p::pat t\<^isub>1::trm t\<^isub>2::trm"} & |
3004 | 1190 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn\<^isub>1(p)"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t\<^isub>1"}, |
1191 |
\isacommand{binds} @{text "bn\<^isub>2(p)"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t\<^isub>2"}\\ |
|
3006 | 1192 |
\end{tabular}} |
1193 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1194 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1195 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1196 |
Otherwise it is possible that @{text "bn\<^isub>1"} and @{text "bn\<^isub>2"} pick |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1197 |
out different atoms to become bound, respectively be free, in @{text "p"}. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1198 |
(Since the Ott-tool does not derive a reasoning infrastructure for |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1199 |
alpha-equated terms with deep binders, it can permit such specifications.) |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1200 |
|
3006 | 1201 |
We also need to restrict the form of the binding functions in order to |
1202 |
ensure the @{text "bn"}-functions can be defined for alpha-equated |
|
1203 |
terms. The main restriction is that we cannot return an atom in a binding |
|
1204 |
function that is also bound in the corresponding term-constructor. |
|
1205 |
Consider again the specification for @{text "trm"} and a contrived |
|
3008 | 1206 |
version for assignments @{text "assn"}: |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1207 |
|
3006 | 1208 |
\begin{equation}\label{bnexp} |
1209 |
\mbox{% |
|
1210 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}} |
|
1211 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype}~@{text "trm ="}~\ldots\\ |
|
1212 |
\isacommand{and} @{text "assn"} $=$\\ |
|
3008 | 1213 |
\hspace{5mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{text "ANil'"}\\ |
1214 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "ACons' x::name y::name t::trm assn"} |
|
3006 | 1215 |
\;\;\isacommand{binds} @{text "y"} \isacommand{in} @{text t}\\ |
1216 |
\isacommand{binder} @{text "bn::assn \<Rightarrow> atom list"}\\ |
|
3008 | 1217 |
\isacommand{where}~@{text "bn(ANil') = []"}\\ |
1218 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "bn(ACons' x y t as) = [atom x] @ bn(as)"}\\ |
|
3006 | 1219 |
\end{tabular}} |
1220 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
1221 |
||
1222 |
\noindent |
|
3011 | 1223 |
In this example the term constructor @{text "ACons'"} has four arguments with |
3017 | 1224 |
a binding clause involving two of them. This constructor is also used in the definition |
3010 | 1225 |
of the binding function. The restriction we have to impose is that the |
3017 | 1226 |
binding function can only return free atoms, that is the ones that are \emph{not} |
3010 | 1227 |
mentioned in a binding clause. Therefore @{text "y"} cannot be used in the |
1228 |
binding function @{text "bn"} (since it is bound in @{text "ACons'"} by the |
|
1229 |
binding clause), but @{text x} can (since it is a free atom). This |
|
1230 |
restriction is sufficient for lifting the binding function to alpha-equated |
|
3017 | 1231 |
terms. If we would permit @{text "bn"} to return @{text "y"}, |
1232 |
then it would not be respectful and therefore cannot be lifted to |
|
1233 |
alpha-equated lambda-terms. |
|
3006 | 1234 |
|
1235 |
In the version of Nominal Isabelle described here, we also adopted the |
|
1236 |
restriction from the Ott-tool that binding functions can only return: the |
|
3008 | 1237 |
empty set or empty list (as in case @{text ANil'}), a singleton set or |
3006 | 1238 |
singleton list containing an atom (case @{text PVar} in \eqref{letpat}), or |
3008 | 1239 |
unions of atom sets or appended atom lists (case @{text ACons'}). This |
3006 | 1240 |
restriction will simplify some automatic definitions and proofs later on. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1241 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1242 |
In order to simplify our definitions of free atoms and alpha-equivalence, |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1243 |
we shall assume specifications |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1244 |
of term-calculi are implicitly \emph{completed}. By this we mean that |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1245 |
for every argument of a term-constructor that is \emph{not} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1246 |
already part of a binding clause given by the user, we add implicitly a special \emph{empty} binding |
3004 | 1247 |
clause, written \isacommand{binds}~@{term "{}"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text "labels"}. In case |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1248 |
of the lambda-terms, the completion produces |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1249 |
|
3006 | 1250 |
\[\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1251 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {\hspace{-1mm}}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1252 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype} @{text lam} =\\ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1253 |
\hspace{5mm}\phantom{$\mid$}~@{text "Var x::name"} |
3004 | 1254 |
\;\;\isacommand{binds}~@{term "{}"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text "x"}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1255 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "App t\<^isub>1::lam t\<^isub>2::lam"} |
3004 | 1256 |
\;\;\isacommand{binds}~@{term "{}"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text "t\<^isub>1 t\<^isub>2"}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1257 |
\hspace{5mm}$\mid$~@{text "Lam x::name t::lam"} |
3004 | 1258 |
\;\;\isacommand{binds}~@{text x} \isacommand{in} @{text t}\\ |
3006 | 1259 |
\end{tabular}} |
1260 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1261 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1262 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1263 |
The point of completion is that we can make definitions over the binding |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1264 |
clauses and be sure to have captured all arguments of a term constructor. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1265 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1266 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1267 |
section {* Alpha-Equivalence and Free Atoms\label{sec:alpha} *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1268 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1269 |
text {* |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1270 |
Having dealt with all syntax matters, the problem now is how we can turn |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1271 |
specifications into actual type definitions in Isabelle/HOL and then |
3006 | 1272 |
establish a reasoning infrastructure for them. As Pottier and Cheney pointed |
1273 |
out \cite{Cheney05,Pottier06}, just re-arranging the arguments of |
|
1274 |
term-constructors so that binders and their bodies are next to each other |
|
1275 |
will result in inadequate representations in cases like \mbox{@{text "Let |
|
1276 |
x\<^isub>1 = t\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>n = t\<^isub>n in s"}}. Therefore we will |
|
3023 | 1277 |
first extract `raw' datatype definitions from the specification and then |
3006 | 1278 |
define explicitly an alpha-equivalence relation over them. We subsequently |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1279 |
construct the quotient of the datatypes according to our alpha-equivalence. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1280 |
|
3006 | 1281 |
|
3023 | 1282 |
The `raw' datatype definition can be obtained by stripping off the |
3025 | 1283 |
binding clauses and the labels from the types given by the user. We also have to invent |
1284 |
new names for the types @{text "ty\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and the term-constructors @{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha>"}. |
|
1285 |
In our implementation we just use the affix ``@{text "_raw"}''. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1286 |
But for the purpose of this paper, we use the superscript @{text "_\<^sup>\<alpha>"} to indicate |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1287 |
that a notion is given for alpha-equivalence classes and leave it out |
3025 | 1288 |
for the corresponding notion given on the raw level. So for example |
3022
4de1d6ab04f7
included comments from Ramana
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
3021
diff
changeset
|
1289 |
we have @{text "ty\<^sup>\<alpha> / ty"} and @{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha> / C"} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1290 |
where @{term ty} is the type used in the quotient construction for |
3025 | 1291 |
@{text "ty\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and @{text "C"} is the term-constructor of the raw type @{text "ty"}, |
3021 | 1292 |
respectively @{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha>"} is the corresponding term-constructor of @{text "ty\<^sup>\<alpha>"}. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1293 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1294 |
The resulting datatype definition is legal in Isabelle/HOL provided the datatypes are |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1295 |
non-empty and the types in the constructors only occur in positive |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1296 |
position (see \cite{Berghofer99} for an in-depth description of the datatype package |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1297 |
in Isabelle/HOL). |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1298 |
We subsequently define each of the user-specified binding |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1299 |
functions @{term "bn"}$_{1..m}$ by recursion over the corresponding |
3025 | 1300 |
raw datatype. We also define permutation operations by |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1301 |
recursion so that for each term constructor @{text "C"} we have that |
3006 | 1302 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1303 |
\begin{equation}\label{ceqvt} |
3006 | 1304 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> (C z\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>n) = C (\<pi> \<bullet> z\<^isub>1) \<dots> (\<pi> \<bullet> z\<^isub>n)"} |
1305 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1306 |
|
3013 | 1307 |
\noindent |
3021 | 1308 |
We will need this operation later when we define the notion of alpha-equivalence. |
3013 | 1309 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1310 |
The first non-trivial step we have to perform is the generation of |
3011 | 1311 |
\emph{free-atom functions} from the specifications.\footnote{Admittedly, the |
3008 | 1312 |
details of our definitions will be somewhat involved. However they are still |
3023 | 1313 |
conceptually simple in comparison with the `positional' approach taken in |
3014 | 1314 |
Ott \cite[Pages 88--95]{ott-jfp}, which uses the notions of \emph{occurrences} and |
1315 |
\emph{partial equivalence relations} over sets of occurrences.} For the |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1316 |
\emph{raw} types @{text "ty"}$_{1..n}$ we define the free-atom functions |
3006 | 1317 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1318 |
\begin{equation}\label{fvars} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1319 |
\mbox{@{text "fa_ty"}$_{1..n}$} |
3006 | 1320 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1321 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1322 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1323 |
by recursion. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1324 |
We define these functions together with auxiliary free-atom functions for |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1325 |
the binding functions. Given raw binding functions @{text "bn"}$_{1..m}$ |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1326 |
we define |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1327 |
|
3006 | 1328 |
\[ |
1329 |
@{text "fa_bn"}\mbox{$_{1..m}$}. |
|
1330 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1331 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1332 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1333 |
The reason for this setup is that in a deep binder not all atoms have to be |
3023 | 1334 |
bound, as we saw in \eqref{letrecs} with the example of `plain' @{text Let}s. We need |
3013 | 1335 |
therefore functions that calculate those free atoms in deep binders. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1336 |
|
3013 | 1337 |
While the idea behind these free-atom functions is simple (they just |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1338 |
collect all atoms that are not bound), because of our rather complicated |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1339 |
binding mechanisms their definitions are somewhat involved. Given |
3025 | 1340 |
a raw term-constructor @{text "C"} of type @{text ty} and some associated |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1341 |
binding clauses @{text "bc\<^isub>1\<dots>bc\<^isub>k"}, the result of @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1342 |
"fa_ty (C z\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>n)"} will be the union @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1343 |
"fa(bc\<^isub>1) \<union> \<dots> \<union> fa(bc\<^isub>k)"} where we will define below what @{text "fa"} for a binding |
3004 | 1344 |
clause means. We only show the details for the mode \isacommand{binds (set)} (the other modes are similar). |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1345 |
Suppose the binding clause @{text bc\<^isub>i} is of the form |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1346 |
|
3006 | 1347 |
\[ |
3004 | 1348 |
\mbox{\isacommand{binds (set)} @{text "b\<^isub>1\<dots>b\<^isub>p"} \isacommand{in} @{text "d\<^isub>1\<dots>d\<^isub>q"}} |
3006 | 1349 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1350 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1351 |
\noindent |
3006 | 1352 |
in which the body-labels @{text "d"}$_{1..q}$ refer to types @{text |
1353 |
ty}$_{1..q}$, and the binders @{text b}$_{1..p}$ either refer to labels of |
|
1354 |
atom types (in case of shallow binders) or to binding functions taking a |
|
1355 |
single label as argument (in case of deep binders). Assuming @{text "D"} |
|
1356 |
stands for the set of free atoms of the bodies, @{text B} for the set of |
|
1357 |
binding atoms in the binders and @{text "B'"} for the set of free atoms in |
|
1358 |
non-recursive deep binders, then the free atoms of the binding clause @{text |
|
1359 |
bc\<^isub>i} are |
|
1360 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1361 |
\begin{equation}\label{fadef} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1362 |
\mbox{@{text "fa(bc\<^isub>i) \<equiv> (D - B) \<union> B'"}}. |
3006 | 1363 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
1364 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1365 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1366 |
The set @{text D} is formally defined as |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1367 |
|
3006 | 1368 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1369 |
@{text "D \<equiv> fa_ty\<^isub>1 d\<^isub>1 \<union> ... \<union> fa_ty\<^isub>q d\<^isub>q"} |
3006 | 1370 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1371 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1372 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1373 |
where in case @{text "d\<^isub>i"} refers to one of the raw types @{text "ty"}$_{1..n}$ from the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1374 |
specification, the function @{text "fa_ty\<^isub>i"} is the corresponding free-atom function |
3021 | 1375 |
we are defining by recursion; otherwise we set \mbox{@{text "fa_ty\<^isub>i \<equiv> supp"}}. The reason |
3008 | 1376 |
for the latter is that @{text "ty"}$_i$ is not a type that is part of the specification, and |
3021 | 1377 |
we assume @{text supp} is the generic function that characterises the free variables of |
3006 | 1378 |
a type (in fact in the next section we will show that the free-variable functions we |
1379 |
define here, are equal to the support once lifted to alpha-equivalence classes). |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1380 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1381 |
In order to formally define the set @{text B} we use the following auxiliary @{text "bn"}-functions |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1382 |
for atom types to which shallow binders may refer\\[-4mm] |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1383 |
|
3008 | 1384 |
\begin{equation}\label{bnaux}\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1385 |
\begin{tabular}{r@ {\hspace{2mm}}c@ {\hspace{2mm}}l} |
3006 | 1386 |
@{text "bn\<^bsub>atom\<^esup> a"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "{atom a}"}\\ |
1387 |
@{text "bn\<^bsub>atom_set\<^esup> as"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "atoms as"}\\ |
|
1388 |
@{text "bn\<^bsub>atom_list\<^esub> as"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "atoms (set as)"} |
|
1389 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
3008 | 1390 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1391 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1392 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1393 |
Like the function @{text atom}, the function @{text "atoms"} coerces |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1394 |
a set of atoms to a set of the generic atom type. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1395 |
It is defined as @{text "atoms as \<equiv> {atom a | a \<in> as}"}. |
3008 | 1396 |
The set @{text B} in \eqref{fadef} is then formally defined as |
3006 | 1397 |
|
1398 |
\begin{equation}\label{bdef} |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1399 |
@{text "B \<equiv> bn_ty\<^isub>1 b\<^isub>1 \<union> ... \<union> bn_ty\<^isub>p b\<^isub>p"} |
3006 | 1400 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
1401 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1402 |
\noindent |
3008 | 1403 |
where we use the auxiliary binding functions from \eqref{bnaux} for shallow |
1404 |
binders (that means when @{text "ty"}$_i$ is of type @{text "atom"}, @{text "atom set"} or |
|
3013 | 1405 |
@{text "atom list"}). |
1406 |
||
1407 |
The set @{text "B'"} in \eqref{fadef} collects all free atoms in |
|
3006 | 1408 |
non-recursive deep binders. Let us assume these binders in the binding |
1409 |
clause @{text "bc\<^isub>i"} are |
|
1410 |
||
1411 |
\[ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1412 |
\mbox{@{text "bn\<^isub>1 l\<^isub>1, \<dots>, bn\<^isub>r l\<^isub>r"}} |
3006 | 1413 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1414 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1415 |
\noindent |
3008 | 1416 |
with @{text "l"}$_{1..r}$ $\subseteq$ @{text "b"}$_{1..p}$ and |
1417 |
none of the @{text "l"}$_{1..r}$ being among the bodies |
|
3006 | 1418 |
@{text "d"}$_{1..q}$. The set @{text "B'"} is defined as |
1419 |
||
1420 |
\begin{equation}\label{bprimedef} |
|
1421 |
@{text "B' \<equiv> fa_bn\<^isub>1 l\<^isub>1 \<union> ... \<union> fa_bn\<^isub>r l\<^isub>r"} |
|
1422 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
1423 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1424 |
\noindent |
3008 | 1425 |
This completes all clauses for the free-atom functions @{text "fa_ty"}$_{1..n}$. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1426 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1427 |
Note that for non-recursive deep binders, we have to add in \eqref{fadef} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1428 |
the set of atoms that are left unbound by the binding functions @{text |
3008 | 1429 |
"bn"}$_{1..m}$. We used for |
3006 | 1430 |
the definition of this set the functions @{text "fa_bn"}$_{1..m}$. The |
1431 |
definition for those functions needs to be extracted from the clauses the |
|
1432 |
user provided for @{text "bn"}$_{1..m}$ Assume the user specified a @{text |
|
1433 |
bn}-clause of the form |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1434 |
|
3006 | 1435 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1436 |
@{text "bn (C z\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>s) = rhs"} |
3006 | 1437 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1438 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1439 |
\noindent |
3006 | 1440 |
where the @{text "z"}$_{1..s}$ are of types @{text "ty"}$_{1..s}$. For |
1441 |
each of the arguments we calculate the free atoms as follows: |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1442 |
|
3006 | 1443 |
\[\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1444 |
\begin{tabular}{c@ {\hspace{2mm}}p{0.9\textwidth}} |
3006 | 1445 |
$\bullet$ & @{term "fa_ty\<^isub>i z\<^isub>i"} provided @{text "z\<^isub>i"} does not occur in @{text "rhs"}\\ |
1446 |
& (that means nothing is bound in @{text "z\<^isub>i"} by the binding function),\smallskip\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1447 |
$\bullet$ & @{term "fa_bn\<^isub>i z\<^isub>i"} provided @{text "z\<^isub>i"} occurs in @{text "rhs"} |
3008 | 1448 |
with the recursive call @{text "bn\<^isub>i z\<^isub>i"}\\ |
3023 | 1449 |
& (that means whatever is `left over' from the @{text "bn"}-function is free)\smallskip\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1450 |
$\bullet$ & @{term "{}"} provided @{text "z\<^isub>i"} occurs in @{text "rhs"}, |
3006 | 1451 |
but without a recursive call\\ |
1452 |
& (that means @{text "z\<^isub>i"} is supposed to become bound by the binding function)\\ |
|
1453 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
1454 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1455 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1456 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1457 |
For defining @{text "fa_bn (C z\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>n)"} we just union up all these sets. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1458 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1459 |
To see how these definitions work in practice, let us reconsider the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1460 |
term-constructors @{text "Let"} and @{text "Let_rec"} shown in |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1461 |
\eqref{letrecs} together with the term-constructors for assignments @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1462 |
"ANil"} and @{text "ACons"}. Since there is a binding function defined for |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1463 |
assignments, we have three free-atom functions, namely @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1464 |
"fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}, @{text "fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub>"} and @{text |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1465 |
"fa\<^bsub>bn\<^esub>"} as follows: |
3006 | 1466 |
|
1467 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1468 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l@ {}} |
3009 | 1469 |
@{text "fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> (Let as t)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "(fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t - set (bn as)) \<union> fa\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as"}\\ |
1470 |
@{text "fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> (Let_rec as t)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "(fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> as \<union> fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t) - set (bn as)"}\smallskip\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1471 |
|
3009 | 1472 |
@{text "fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> (ANil)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{term "{}"}\\ |
1473 |
@{text "fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> (ACons a t as)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "(supp a) \<union> (fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t) \<union> (fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> as)"}\smallskip\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1474 |
|
3009 | 1475 |
@{text "fa\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> (ANil)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{term "{}"}\\ |
1476 |
@{text "fa\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> (ACons a t as)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "(fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t) \<union> (fa\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as)"} |
|
3006 | 1477 |
\end{tabular}} |
1478 |
\]\smallskip |
|
1479 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1480 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1481 |
\noindent |
3006 | 1482 |
Recall that @{text ANil} and @{text "ACons"} have no binding clause in the |
1483 |
specification. The corresponding free-atom function @{text |
|
1484 |
"fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub>"} therefore returns all free atoms of an assignment |
|
1485 |
(in case of @{text "ACons"}, they are given in terms of @{text supp}, @{text |
|
1486 |
"fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"} and @{text "fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub>"}). The binding |
|
1487 |
only takes place in @{text Let} and @{text "Let_rec"}. In case of @{text |
|
1488 |
"Let"}, the binding clause specifies that all atoms given by @{text "set (bn |
|
1489 |
as)"} have to be bound in @{text t}. Therefore we have to subtract @{text |
|
1490 |
"set (bn as)"} from @{text "fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t"}. However, we also need |
|
1491 |
to add all atoms that are free in @{text "as"}. This is in contrast with |
|
1492 |
@{text "Let_rec"} where we have a recursive binder to bind all occurrences |
|
1493 |
of the atoms in @{text "set (bn as)"} also inside @{text "as"}. Therefore we |
|
1494 |
have to subtract @{text "set (bn as)"} from both @{text |
|
1495 |
"fa\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t"} and @{text "fa\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> as"}. Like the |
|
1496 |
function @{text "bn"}, the function @{text "fa\<^bsub>bn\<^esub>"} traverses |
|
1497 |
the list of assignments, but instead returns the free atoms, which means in |
|
1498 |
this example the free atoms in the argument @{text "t"}. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1499 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1500 |
|
3023 | 1501 |
An interesting point in this example is that a `naked' assignment (@{text |
3006 | 1502 |
"ANil"} or @{text "ACons"}) does not bind any atoms, even if the binding |
1503 |
function is specified over assignments. Only in the context of a @{text Let} |
|
1504 |
or @{text "Let_rec"}, where the binding clauses are given, will some atoms |
|
1505 |
actually become bound. This is a phenomenon that has also been pointed out |
|
1506 |
in \cite{ott-jfp}. For us this observation is crucial, because we would not |
|
1507 |
be able to lift the @{text "bn"}-functions to alpha-equated terms if they |
|
1508 |
act on atoms that are bound. In that case, these functions would \emph{not} |
|
1509 |
respect alpha-equivalence. |
|
1510 |
||
3023 | 1511 |
Having the free-atom functions at our disposal, we can next define the |
3006 | 1512 |
alpha-equivalence relations for the raw types @{text |
1513 |
"ty"}$_{1..n}$. We write them as |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1514 |
|
3006 | 1515 |
\[ |
1516 |
\mbox{@{text "\<approx>ty"}$_{1..n}$}. |
|
1517 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1518 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1519 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1520 |
Like with the free-atom functions, we also need to |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1521 |
define auxiliary alpha-equivalence relations |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1522 |
|
3006 | 1523 |
\[ |
1524 |
\mbox{@{text "\<approx>bn\<^isub>"}$_{1..m}$} |
|
1525 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1526 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1527 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1528 |
for the binding functions @{text "bn"}$_{1..m}$, |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1529 |
To simplify our definitions we will use the following abbreviations for |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1530 |
\emph{compound equivalence relations} and \emph{compound free-atom functions} acting on tuples. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1531 |
|
3006 | 1532 |
\[\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1533 |
\begin{tabular}{r@ {\hspace{2mm}}c@ {\hspace{2mm}}l} |
3006 | 1534 |
@{text "(x\<^isub>1,\<dots>, x\<^isub>n) (R\<^isub>1,\<dots>, R\<^isub>n) (y\<^isub>1,\<dots>, y\<^isub>n)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & |
1535 |
@{text "x\<^isub>1 R\<^isub>1 y\<^isub>1 \<and> \<dots> \<and> x\<^isub>n R\<^isub>n y\<^isub>n"}\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1536 |
@{text "(fa\<^isub>1,\<dots>, fa\<^isub>n) (x\<^isub>1,\<dots>, x\<^isub>n)"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "fa\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>1 \<union> \<dots> \<union> fa\<^isub>n x\<^isub>n"}\\ |
3006 | 1537 |
\end{tabular}} |
1538 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1539 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1540 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1541 |
The alpha-equivalence relations are defined as inductive predicates |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1542 |
having a single clause for each term-constructor. Assuming a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1543 |
term-constructor @{text C} is of type @{text ty} and has the binding clauses |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1544 |
@{term "bc"}$_{1..k}$, then the alpha-equivalence clause has the form |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1545 |
|
3006 | 1546 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1547 |
\mbox{\infer{@{text "C z\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>n \<approx>ty C z\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<PRIME>\<^isub>n"}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1548 |
{@{text "prems(bc\<^isub>1) \<dots> prems(bc\<^isub>k)"}}} |
3006 | 1549 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1550 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1551 |
\noindent |
3006 | 1552 |
The task below is to specify what the premises corresponding to a binding |
3010 | 1553 |
clause are. To understand better what the general pattern is, let us first |
3006 | 1554 |
treat the special instance where @{text "bc\<^isub>i"} is the empty binding clause |
1555 |
of the form |
|
1556 |
||
1557 |
\[ |
|
3004 | 1558 |
\mbox{\isacommand{binds (set)} @{term "{}"} \isacommand{in} @{text "d\<^isub>1\<dots>d\<^isub>q"}.} |
3006 | 1559 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1560 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1561 |
\noindent |
3010 | 1562 |
In this binding clause no atom is bound and we only have to `alpha-relate' |
1563 |
the bodies. For this we build first the tuples @{text "D \<equiv> (d\<^isub>1,\<dots>, |
|
1564 |
d\<^isub>q)"} and @{text "D' \<equiv> (d\<PRIME>\<^isub>1,\<dots>, d\<PRIME>\<^isub>q)"} |
|
3034 | 1565 |
whereby the labels @{text "d"}$_{1..q}$ refer to some of the arguments @{text |
1566 |
"z"}$_{1..n}$ and respectively @{text "d\<PRIME>"}$_{1..q}$ to some of @{text |
|
3010 | 1567 |
"z\<PRIME>"}$_{1..n}$ of the term-constructor. In order to relate two such |
1568 |
tuples we define the compound alpha-equivalence relation @{text "R"} as |
|
1569 |
follows |
|
1570 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1571 |
\begin{equation}\label{rempty} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1572 |
\mbox{@{text "R \<equiv> (R\<^isub>1,\<dots>, R\<^isub>q)"}} |
3010 | 1573 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1574 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1575 |
\noindent |
3010 | 1576 |
with @{text "R\<^isub>i"} being @{text "\<approx>ty\<^isub>i"} if the corresponding |
1577 |
labels @{text "d\<^isub>i"} and @{text "d\<PRIME>\<^isub>i"} refer to a |
|
3034 | 1578 |
recursive argument of @{text C} and have type @{text "ty\<^isub>i"}; otherwise |
3010 | 1579 |
we take @{text "R\<^isub>i"} to be the equality @{text "="}. Again the |
1580 |
latter is because @{text "ty\<^isub>i"} is not part of the specified types |
|
1581 |
and alpha-equivalence of any previously defined type is supposed to coincide |
|
1582 |
with equality. This lets us now define the premise for an empty binding |
|
1583 |
clause succinctly as @{text "prems(bc\<^isub>i) \<equiv> D R D'"}, which can be |
|
1584 |
unfolded to the series of premises |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1585 |
|
3010 | 1586 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1587 |
@{text "d\<^isub>1 R\<^isub>1 d\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 \<dots> d\<^isub>q R\<^isub>q d\<PRIME>\<^isub>q"}. |
3010 | 1588 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1589 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1590 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1591 |
We will use the unfolded version in the examples below. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1592 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1593 |
Now suppose the binding clause @{text "bc\<^isub>i"} is of the general form |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1594 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1595 |
\begin{equation}\label{nonempty} |
3004 | 1596 |
\mbox{\isacommand{binds (set)} @{text "b\<^isub>1\<dots>b\<^isub>p"} \isacommand{in} @{text "d\<^isub>1\<dots>d\<^isub>q"}.} |
3010 | 1597 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1598 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1599 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1600 |
In this case we define a premise @{text P} using the relation |
3011 | 1601 |
$\approx_{\,\textit{set}}^{\textit{R}, \textit{fa}}$ given in Section~\ref{sec:binders} (similarly |
1602 |
$\approx_{\,\textit{set+}}^{\textit{R}, \textit{fa}}$ and |
|
1603 |
$\approx_{\,\textit{list}}^{\textit{R}, \textit{fa}}$ for the other |
|
3021 | 1604 |
binding modes). As above, we first build the tuples @{text "D"} and |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1605 |
@{text "D'"} for the bodies @{text "d"}$_{1..q}$, and the corresponding |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1606 |
compound alpha-relation @{text "R"} (shown in \eqref{rempty}). |
3013 | 1607 |
For $\approx_{\,\textit{set}}^{\textit{R}, \textit{fa}}$ we also need |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1608 |
a compound free-atom function for the bodies defined as |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1609 |
|
3010 | 1610 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1611 |
\mbox{@{text "fa \<equiv> (fa_ty\<^isub>1,\<dots>, fa_ty\<^isub>q)"}} |
3010 | 1612 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1613 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1614 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1615 |
with the assumption that the @{text "d"}$_{1..q}$ refer to arguments of types @{text "ty"}$_{1..q}$. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1616 |
The last ingredient we need are the sets of atoms bound in the bodies. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1617 |
For this we take |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1618 |
|
3010 | 1619 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1620 |
@{text "B \<equiv> bn_ty\<^isub>1 b\<^isub>1 \<union> \<dots> \<union> bn_ty\<^isub>p b\<^isub>p"}\;.\\ |
3010 | 1621 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1622 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1623 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1624 |
Similarly for @{text "B'"} using the labels @{text "b\<PRIME>"}$_{1..p}$. This |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1625 |
lets us formally define the premise @{text P} for a non-empty binding clause as: |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1626 |
|
3010 | 1627 |
\[ |
3006 | 1628 |
\mbox{@{term "P \<equiv> alpha_set_ex (B, D) R fa (B', D')"}}\;. |
3010 | 1629 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1630 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1631 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1632 |
This premise accounts for alpha-equivalence of the bodies of the binding |
3010 | 1633 |
clause. However, in case the binders have non-recursive deep binders, this |
3023 | 1634 |
premise is not enough: we also have to `propagate' alpha-equivalence |
3010 | 1635 |
inside the structure of these binders. An example is @{text "Let"} where we |
1636 |
have to make sure the right-hand sides of assignments are |
|
1637 |
alpha-equivalent. For this we use relations @{text "\<approx>bn"}$_{1..m}$ (which we |
|
3021 | 1638 |
will define shortly). Let us assume the non-recursive deep binders |
3010 | 1639 |
in @{text "bc\<^isub>i"} are |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1640 |
|
3010 | 1641 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1642 |
@{text "bn\<^isub>1 l\<^isub>1, \<dots>, bn\<^isub>r l\<^isub>r"}. |
3010 | 1643 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1644 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1645 |
\noindent |
3010 | 1646 |
The tuple @{text L} consists then of all these binders @{text "(l\<^isub>1,\<dots>,l\<^isub>r)"} |
1647 |
(similarly @{text "L'"}) and the compound equivalence relation @{text "R'"} |
|
1648 |
is @{text "(\<approx>bn\<^isub>1,\<dots>,\<approx>bn\<^isub>r)"}. All premises for @{text "bc\<^isub>i"} are then given by |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1649 |
|
3010 | 1650 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1651 |
@{text "prems(bc\<^isub>i) \<equiv> P \<and> L R' L'"} |
3010 | 1652 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1653 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1654 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1655 |
The auxiliary alpha-equivalence relations @{text "\<approx>bn"}$_{1..m}$ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1656 |
in @{text "R'"} are defined as follows: assuming a @{text bn}-clause is of the form |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1657 |
|
3010 | 1658 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1659 |
@{text "bn (C z\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>s) = rhs"} |
3010 | 1660 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1661 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1662 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1663 |
where the @{text "z"}$_{1..s}$ are of types @{text "ty"}$_{1..s}$, |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1664 |
then the corresponding alpha-equivalence clause for @{text "\<approx>bn"} has the form |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1665 |
|
3010 | 1666 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1667 |
\mbox{\infer{@{text "C z\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>s \<approx>bn C z\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<PRIME>\<^isub>s"}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1668 |
{@{text "z\<^isub>1 R\<^isub>1 z\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 \<dots> z\<^isub>s R\<^isub>s z\<PRIME>\<^isub>s"}}} |
3010 | 1669 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1670 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1671 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1672 |
In this clause the relations @{text "R"}$_{1..s}$ are given by |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1673 |
|
3010 | 1674 |
\[\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1675 |
\begin{tabular}{c@ {\hspace{2mm}}p{0.9\textwidth}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1676 |
$\bullet$ & @{text "z\<^isub>i \<approx>ty z\<PRIME>\<^isub>i"} provided @{text "z\<^isub>i"} does not occur in @{text rhs} and |
3010 | 1677 |
is a recursive argument of @{text C},\smallskip\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1678 |
$\bullet$ & @{text "z\<^isub>i = z\<PRIME>\<^isub>i"} provided @{text "z\<^isub>i"} does not occur in @{text rhs} |
3010 | 1679 |
and is a non-recursive argument of @{text C},\smallskip\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1680 |
$\bullet$ & @{text "z\<^isub>i \<approx>bn\<^isub>i z\<PRIME>\<^isub>i"} provided @{text "z\<^isub>i"} occurs in @{text rhs} |
3010 | 1681 |
with the recursive call @{text "bn\<^isub>i x\<^isub>i"} and\smallskip\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1682 |
$\bullet$ & @{text True} provided @{text "z\<^isub>i"} occurs in @{text rhs} but without a |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1683 |
recursive call. |
3010 | 1684 |
\end{tabular}} |
1685 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1686 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1687 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1688 |
This completes the definition of alpha-equivalence. As a sanity check, we can show |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1689 |
that the premises of empty binding clauses are a special case of the clauses for |
3011 | 1690 |
non-empty ones (we just have to unfold the definition of |
1691 |
$\approx_{\,\textit{set}}^{\textit{R}, \textit{fa}}$ and take @{text "0"} |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1692 |
for the existentially quantified permutation). |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1693 |
|
3011 | 1694 |
Again let us take a look at a concrete example for these definitions. For |
3021 | 1695 |
the specification shown in \eqref{letrecs} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1696 |
we have three relations $\approx_{\textit{trm}}$, $\approx_{\textit{assn}}$ and |
3017 | 1697 |
$\approx_{\textit{bn}}$ with the following rules: |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1698 |
|
3016 | 1699 |
\begin{equation}\label{rawalpha}\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1700 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c @ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1701 |
\infer{@{text "Let as t \<approx>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> Let as' t'"}} |
3010 | 1702 |
{@{term "alpha_lst_ex (bn as, t) alpha_trm fa_trm (bn as', t')"} & |
1703 |
\hspace{5mm}@{text "as \<approx>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as'"}}\\ |
|
1704 |
\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1705 |
\makebox[0mm]{\infer{@{text "Let_rec as t \<approx>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> Let_rec as' t'"}} |
3010 | 1706 |
{@{term "alpha_lst_ex (bn as, ast) alpha_trm2 fa_trm2 (bn as', ast')"}}}\\ |
1707 |
\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1708 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1709 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c @ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1710 |
\infer{@{text "ANil \<approx>\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> ANil"}}{}\hspace{9mm} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1711 |
\infer{@{text "ACons a t as \<approx>\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> ACons a' t' as"}} |
3010 | 1712 |
{@{text "a = a'"} & \hspace{5mm}@{text "t \<approx>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t'"} & \hspace{5mm}@{text "as \<approx>\<^bsub>assn\<^esub> as'"}} |
1713 |
\end{tabular}\\ |
|
1714 |
\\ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1715 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1716 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c @ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1717 |
\infer{@{text "ANil \<approx>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> ANil"}}{}\hspace{9mm} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1718 |
\infer{@{text "ACons a t as \<approx>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> ACons a' t' as"}} |
3010 | 1719 |
{@{text "t \<approx>\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> t'"} & \hspace{5mm}@{text "as \<approx>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as'"}} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1720 |
\end{tabular} |
3010 | 1721 |
\end{tabular}} |
3016 | 1722 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1723 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1724 |
\noindent |
3011 | 1725 |
Notice the difference between $\approx_{\textit{assn}}$ and |
3023 | 1726 |
$\approx_{\textit{bn}}$: the latter only `tracks' alpha-equivalence of |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1727 |
the components in an assignment that are \emph{not} bound. This is needed in the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1728 |
clause for @{text "Let"} (which has |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1729 |
a non-recursive binder). |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1730 |
The underlying reason is that the terms inside an assignment are not meant |
3023 | 1731 |
to be `under' the binder. Such a premise is \emph{not} needed in @{text "Let_rec"}, |
1732 |
because there all components of an assignment are `under' the binder. |
|
3021 | 1733 |
Note also that in case of more than one body (that is in the @{text "Let_rec"}-case above) |
3013 | 1734 |
we need to parametrise the relation $\approx_{\textit{list}}$ with a compound |
1735 |
equivalence relation and a compound free-atom function. This is because the |
|
3017 | 1736 |
corresponding binding clause specifies a binder with two bodies, namely |
1737 |
@{text "as"} and @{text "t"}. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1738 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1739 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1740 |
section {* Establishing the Reasoning Infrastructure *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1741 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1742 |
text {* |
3010 | 1743 |
Having made all necessary definitions for raw terms, we can start with |
1744 |
establishing the reasoning infrastructure for the alpha-equated types @{text |
|
1745 |
"ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$, that is the types the user originally specified. We |
|
1746 |
give in this section and the next the proofs we need for establishing this |
|
3012 | 1747 |
infrastructure. One point of our work is that we have completely |
3010 | 1748 |
automated these proofs in Isabelle/HOL. |
1749 |
||
1750 |
First we establish that the free-variable functions, the binding functions and the |
|
3012 | 1751 |
alpha-equi\-va\-lences are equivariant. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1752 |
|
3010 | 1753 |
\begin{lem}\mbox{}\\ |
1754 |
@{text "(i)"} The functions @{text "fa_ty"}$_{1..n}$, @{text "fa_bn"}$_{1..m}$ and |
|
1755 |
@{text "bn"}$_{1..m}$ are equivariant.\\ |
|
1756 |
@{text "(ii)"} The relations @{text "\<approx>ty"}$_{1..n}$ and |
|
1757 |
@{text "\<approx>bn"}$_{1..m}$ are equivariant. |
|
1758 |
\end{lem} |
|
1759 |
||
1760 |
\begin{proof} |
|
3015 | 1761 |
The function package of Isabelle/HOL allows us to prove the first part by |
1762 |
mutual induction over the definitions of the functions.\footnote{We have |
|
3023 | 1763 |
that the free-atom functions are terminating. From this the function |
3025 | 1764 |
package derives an induction principle~\cite{Krauss09}.} The second is by a |
3015 | 1765 |
straightforward induction over the rules of @{text "\<approx>ty"}$_{1..n}$ and |
1766 |
@{text "\<approx>bn"}$_{1..m}$ using the first part. |
|
3010 | 1767 |
\end{proof} |
1768 |
||
1769 |
\noindent |
|
1770 |
Next we establish that the alpha-equivalence relations defined in the |
|
3012 | 1771 |
previous section are indeed equivalence relations. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1772 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1773 |
\begin{lem}\label{equiv} |
3010 | 1774 |
The relations @{text "\<approx>ty"}$_{1..n}$ and @{text "\<approx>bn"}$_{1..m}$ are |
1775 |
equivalence relations. |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1776 |
\end{lem} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1777 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1778 |
\begin{proof} |
3017 | 1779 |
The proofs are by induction. The non-trivial |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1780 |
cases involve premises built up by $\approx_{\textit{set}}$, |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1781 |
$\approx_{\textit{set+}}$ and $\approx_{\textit{list}}$. They |
3010 | 1782 |
can be dealt with as in Lemma~\ref{alphaeq}. However, the transitivity |
1783 |
case needs in addition the fact that the relations are equivariant. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1784 |
\end{proof} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1785 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1786 |
\noindent |
3012 | 1787 |
We can feed the last lemma into our quotient package and obtain new types |
1788 |
@{text "ty"}$^\alpha_{1..n}$ representing alpha-equated terms of types |
|
1789 |
@{text "ty"}$_{1..n}$. We also obtain definitions for the term-constructors |
|
3025 | 1790 |
@{text "C"}$^\alpha_{1..k}$ from the raw term-constructors @{text |
3012 | 1791 |
"C"}$_{1..k}$, and similar definitions for the free-atom functions @{text |
3010 | 1792 |
"fa_ty"}$^\alpha_{1..n}$ and @{text "fa_bn"}$^\alpha_{1..m}$ as well as the |
3012 | 1793 |
binding functions @{text "bn"}$^\alpha_{1..m}$. However, these definitions |
1794 |
are not really useful to the user, since they are given in terms of the |
|
1795 |
isomorphisms we obtained by creating new types in Isabelle/HOL (recall the |
|
1796 |
picture shown in the Introduction). |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1797 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1798 |
The first useful property for the user is the fact that distinct |
3012 | 1799 |
term-constructors are not equal, that is the property |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1800 |
|
3012 | 1801 |
\begin{equation}\label{distinctalpha} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1802 |
\mbox{@{text "C"}$^\alpha$~@{text "x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r"}~@{text "\<noteq>"}~% |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1803 |
@{text "D"}$^\alpha$~@{text "y\<^isub>1 \<dots> y\<^isub>s"}} |
3012 | 1804 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1805 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1806 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1807 |
whenever @{text "C"}$^\alpha$~@{text "\<noteq>"}~@{text "D"}$^\alpha$. |
3012 | 1808 |
In order to derive this property, we use the definition of alpha-equivalence |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1809 |
and establish that |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1810 |
|
3012 | 1811 |
\begin{equation}\label{distinctraw} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1812 |
\mbox{@{text "C x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r"}\;$\not\approx$@{text ty}\;@{text "D y\<^isub>1 \<dots> y\<^isub>s"}} |
3012 | 1813 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1814 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1815 |
\noindent |
3025 | 1816 |
holds for the corresponding raw term-constructors. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1817 |
In order to deduce \eqref{distinctalpha} from \eqref{distinctraw}, our quotient |
3025 | 1818 |
package needs to know that the raw term-constructors @{text "C"} and @{text "D"} |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1819 |
are \emph{respectful} w.r.t.~the alpha-equivalence relations (see \cite{Homeier05}). |
3012 | 1820 |
Given, for example, @{text "C"} is of type @{text "ty"} with argument types |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1821 |
@{text "ty"}$_{1..r}$, respectfulness amounts to showing that |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1822 |
|
3012 | 1823 |
\[\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1824 |
@{text "C x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r \<approx>ty C x\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<PRIME>\<^isub>r"} |
3012 | 1825 |
}\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1826 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1827 |
\noindent |
3012 | 1828 |
holds under the assumptions \mbox{@{text |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1829 |
"x\<^isub>i \<approx>ty\<^isub>i x\<PRIME>\<^isub>i"}} whenever @{text "x\<^isub>i"} |
3013 | 1830 |
and @{text "x\<PRIME>\<^isub>i"} are recursive arguments of @{text C}, and |
3012 | 1831 |
@{text "x\<^isub>i = x\<PRIME>\<^isub>i"} whenever they are non-recursive arguments |
1832 |
(similarly for @{text "D"}). For this we have to show |
|
1833 |
by induction over the definitions of alpha-equivalences the following |
|
1834 |
auxiliary implications |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1835 |
|
3012 | 1836 |
\begin{equation}\label{fnresp}\mbox{ |
1837 |
\begin{tabular}{lll} |
|
1838 |
@{text "x \<approx>ty\<^isub>i x'"} & implies & @{text "fa_ty\<^isub>i x = fa_ty\<^isub>i x'"}\\ |
|
1839 |
@{text "x \<approx>ty\<^isub>l x'"} & implies & @{text "fa_bn\<^isub>j x = fa_bn\<^isub>j x'"}\\ |
|
1840 |
@{text "x \<approx>ty\<^isub>l x'"} & implies & @{text "bn\<^isub>j x = bn\<^isub>j x'"}\\ |
|
1841 |
@{text "x \<approx>ty\<^isub>l x'"} & implies & @{text "x \<approx>bn\<^isub>j x'"}\\ |
|
1842 |
\end{tabular} |
|
1843 |
}\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
1844 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1845 |
\noindent |
3012 | 1846 |
whereby @{text "ty\<^isub>l"} is the type over which @{text "bn\<^isub>j"} |
3013 | 1847 |
is defined. Whereas the first, second and last implication are true by |
3012 | 1848 |
how we stated our definitions, the third \emph{only} holds because of our |
1849 |
restriction imposed on the form of the binding functions---namely \emph{not} |
|
3013 | 1850 |
to return any bound atoms. In Ott, in contrast, the user may define @{text |
3012 | 1851 |
"bn"}$_{1..m}$ so that they return bound atoms and in this case the third |
3013 | 1852 |
implication is \emph{not} true. A result is that in general the lifting of the |
3012 | 1853 |
corresponding binding functions in Ott to alpha-equated terms is impossible. |
3025 | 1854 |
Having established respectfulness for the raw term-constructors, the |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1855 |
quotient package is able to automatically deduce \eqref{distinctalpha} from |
3017 | 1856 |
\eqref{distinctraw}. |
1857 |
||
1858 |
Next we can lift the permutation operations defined in \eqref{ceqvt}. In |
|
1859 |
order to make this lifting to go through, we have to show that the |
|
1860 |
permutation operations are respectful. This amounts to showing that the |
|
1861 |
alpha-equivalence relations are equivariant, which |
|
1862 |
we already established in Lemma~\ref{equiv}. As a result we can add the |
|
1863 |
equations |
|
1864 |
||
1865 |
\begin{equation}\label{calphaeqvt} |
|
1866 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> (C\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r) = C\<^sup>\<alpha> (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1) \<dots> (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>r)"} |
|
1867 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
1868 |
||
1869 |
\noindent |
|
1870 |
to our infrastructure. In a similar fashion we can lift the defining equations |
|
1871 |
of the free-atom functions @{text "fa_ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$ and |
|
1872 |
@{text "fa_bn\<AL>"}$_{1..m}$ as well as of the binding functions @{text |
|
1873 |
"bn\<AL>"}$_{1..m}$ and size functions @{text "size_ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$. |
|
3025 | 1874 |
The latter are defined automatically for the raw types @{text "ty"}$_{1..n}$ |
3017 | 1875 |
by the datatype package of Isabelle/HOL. |
1876 |
||
3025 | 1877 |
We also need to lift the properties that characterise when two raw terms of the form |
3010 | 1878 |
|
1879 |
\[ |
|
1880 |
\mbox{@{text "C x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r \<approx>ty C x\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<PRIME>\<^isub>r"}} |
|
1881 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1882 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1883 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1884 |
are alpha-equivalent. This gives us conditions when the corresponding |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
1885 |
alpha-equated terms are \emph{equal}, namely |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1886 |
|
3010 | 1887 |
\[ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1888 |
@{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r = C\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<PRIME>\<^isub>r"}. |
3010 | 1889 |
\]\smallskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1890 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1891 |
\noindent |
3017 | 1892 |
We call these conditions as \emph{quasi-injectivity}. They correspond to the |
3021 | 1893 |
premises in our alpha-equiva\-lence relations, except that the |
3017 | 1894 |
relations @{text "\<approx>ty"}$_{1..n}$ are all replaced by equality (and similarly |
1895 |
the free-atom and binding functions are replaced by their lifted |
|
1896 |
counterparts). Recall the alpha-equivalence rules for @{text "Let"} and |
|
1897 |
@{text "Let_rec"} shown in \eqref{rawalpha}. For @{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and |
|
1898 |
@{text "Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha>"} we have |
|
3016 | 1899 |
|
1900 |
\begin{equation}\label{alphalift}\mbox{ |
|
1901 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c @ {}} |
|
1902 |
\infer{@{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha> as t = Let\<^sup>\<alpha> as' t'"}} |
|
1903 |
{@{term "alpha_lst_ex (bn_al as, t) equal fa_trm_al (bn as', t')"} & |
|
1904 |
\hspace{5mm}@{text "as \<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as'"}}\\ |
|
1905 |
\\ |
|
1906 |
\makebox[0mm]{\infer{@{text "Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha> as t = Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha> as' t'"}} |
|
1907 |
{@{term "alpha_lst_ex (bn_al as, ast) equ2 fa_trm2_al (bn_al as', ast')"}}}\\ |
|
1908 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
1909 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
1910 |
||
3017 | 1911 |
We can also add to our infrastructure cases lemmas and a (mutual) |
3012 | 1912 |
induction principle for the types @{text "ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$. The cases |
3015 | 1913 |
lemmas allow the user to deduce a property @{text "P"} by exhaustively |
3025 | 1914 |
analysing how an element of a type, say @{text "ty\<AL>"}$_i$, can be |
3015 | 1915 |
constructed (that means one case for each of the term-constructors in @{text |
1916 |
"ty\<AL>"}$_i\,$). The lifted cases lemma for the type @{text |
|
1917 |
"ty\<AL>"}$_i\,$ looks as follows |
|
3012 | 1918 |
|
3015 | 1919 |
\begin{equation}\label{cases} |
3012 | 1920 |
\infer{P} |
1921 |
{\begin{array}{l} |
|
1922 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>k. y = C\<AL>\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>k \<Rightarrow> P"}\\ |
|
3030 | 1923 |
\hspace{5mm}\vdots\\ |
3012 | 1924 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>l. y = C\<AL>\<^isub>m x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>l \<Rightarrow> P"}\\ |
1925 |
\end{array}} |
|
3015 | 1926 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
3012 | 1927 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
1928 |
\noindent |
3012 | 1929 |
where @{text "y"} is a variable of type @{text "ty"}$_i$ and @{text "P"} is the |
3013 | 1930 |
property that is established by the case analysis. Similarly, we have a (mutual) |
1931 |
induction principle for the types @{text "ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$, which is of the |
|
1932 |
form |
|
3012 | 1933 |
|
3015 | 1934 |
\begin{equation}\label{induct} |
3012 | 1935 |
\infer{@{text "P\<^isub>1 y\<^isub>1 \<and> \<dots> \<and> P\<^isub>n y\<^isub>n "}} |
1936 |
{\begin{array}{l} |
|
1937 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>k. P\<^isub>i x\<^isub>i \<and> \<dots> \<and> P\<^isub>j x\<^isub>j \<Rightarrow> P (C\<AL>\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>k)"}\\ |
|
3030 | 1938 |
\hspace{5mm}\vdots\\ |
3012 | 1939 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>l. P\<^isub>r x\<^isub>r \<and> \<dots> \<and> P\<^isub>s x\<^isub>s \<Rightarrow> P (C\<AL>\<^isub>m x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>l)"}\\ |
1940 |
\end{array}} |
|
3015 | 1941 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
1942 |
||
1943 |
\noindent |
|
3021 | 1944 |
whereby the @{text P}$_{1..n}$ are the properties established by the |
1945 |
induction, and the @{text y}$_{1..n}$ are of type @{text |
|
1946 |
"ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$. Note that for the term constructors @{text |
|
1947 |
"C"}$^\alpha_1$ the induction principle has a hypothesis of the form |
|
3015 | 1948 |
|
1949 |
\[ |
|
1950 |
\mbox{@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>k. P\<^isub>i x\<^isub>i \<and> \<dots> \<and> P\<^isub>j x\<^isub>j \<Rightarrow> P (C\<AL>\<^sub>1 x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>k)"}} |
|
1951 |
\]\smallskip |
|
1952 |
||
1953 |
\noindent |
|
1954 |
in which the @{text "x"}$_{i..j}$ @{text "\<subseteq>"} @{text "x"}$_{1..k}$ are the |
|
1955 |
recursive arguments of this term constructor (similarly for the other |
|
1956 |
term-constructors). |
|
1957 |
||
1958 |
Recall the lambda-calculus with @{text "Let"}-patterns shown in |
|
1959 |
\eqref{letpat}. The cases lemmas and the induction principle shown in |
|
3023 | 1960 |
\eqref{cases} and \eqref{induct} boil down in that example to the following three inference |
3025 | 1961 |
rules: |
3015 | 1962 |
|
1963 |
\begin{equation}\label{inductex}\mbox{ |
|
3018 | 1964 |
\begin{tabular}{c} |
1965 |
\multicolumn{1}{@ {\hspace{-5mm}}l}{cases lemmas:}\smallskip\\ |
|
3015 | 1966 |
\infer{@{text "P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}} |
3017 | 1967 |
{\begin{array}{@ {}l@ {}} |
3015 | 1968 |
@{text "\<forall>x. y = Var\<^sup>\<alpha> x \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}\\ |
1969 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. y = App\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}\\ |
|
1970 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. y = Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}\\ |
|
3018 | 1971 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3. y = Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"} |
1972 |
\end{array}}\hspace{10mm} |
|
3015 | 1973 |
|
1974 |
\infer{@{text "P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub>"}} |
|
3017 | 1975 |
{\begin{array}{@ {}l@ {}} |
3015 | 1976 |
@{text "\<forall>x. y = PVar\<^sup>\<alpha> x \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub>"}\\ |
1977 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. y = PTup\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub>"} |
|
3018 | 1978 |
\end{array}}\medskip\\ |
1979 |
||
1980 |
\multicolumn{1}{@ {\hspace{-5mm}}l}{induction principle:}\smallskip\\ |
|
3015 | 1981 |
|
1982 |
\infer{@{text "P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> y\<^isub>1 \<and> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> y\<^isub>2"}} |
|
3017 | 1983 |
{\begin{array}{@ {}l@ {}} |
3015 | 1984 |
@{text "\<forall>x. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> (Var\<^sup>\<alpha> x)"}\\ |
1985 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> x\<^isub>1 \<and> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> (App\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2)"}\\ |
|
1986 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> (Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2)"}\\ |
|
3018 | 1987 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3. P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> x\<^isub>1 \<and> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> x\<^isub>2 \<and> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> x\<^isub>3 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> (Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3)"}\\ |
3015 | 1988 |
@{text "\<forall>x. P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> (PVar\<^sup>\<alpha> x)"}\\ |
1989 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> x\<^isub>1 \<and> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> (PTup\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2)"} |
|
1990 |
\end{array}} |
|
1991 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
1992 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
1993 |
||
1994 |
By working now completely on the alpha-equated level, we |
|
1995 |
can first show using \eqref{calphaeqvt} that the support of each term |
|
1996 |
constructor is included in the support of its arguments, |
|
1997 |
namely |
|
1998 |
||
1999 |
\[ |
|
2000 |
@{text "(supp x\<^isub>1 \<union> \<dots> \<union> supp x\<^isub>r) supports (C\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r)"} |
|
3012 | 2001 |
\]\smallskip |
2002 |
||
2003 |
\noindent |
|
3015 | 2004 |
This allows us to prove using the induction principle for @{text "ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$ |
2005 |
that every element of type @{text "ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$ is finitely supported |
|
3021 | 2006 |
(using Proposition~\ref{supportsprop}{\it (i)}). |
3015 | 2007 |
Similarly, we can establish by induction that the free-atom functions and binding |
2008 |
functions are equivariant, namely |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2009 |
|
3010 | 2010 |
\[\mbox{ |
2011 |
\begin{tabular}{rcl} |
|
2012 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> (fa_ty\<AL>\<^isub>i x)"} & $=$ & @{text "fa_ty\<AL>\<^isub>i (\<pi> \<bullet> x)"}\\ |
|
2013 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> (fa_bn\<AL>\<^isub>j x)"} & $=$ & @{text "fa_bn\<AL>\<^isub>j (\<pi> \<bullet> x)"}\\ |
|
2014 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> (bn\<AL>\<^isub>j x)"} & $=$ & @{text "bn\<AL>\<^isub>j (\<pi> \<bullet> x)"}\\ |
|
2015 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
3012 | 2016 |
\]\smallskip |
3010 | 2017 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2018 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2019 |
\noindent |
3015 | 2020 |
Lastly, we can show that the support of elements in @{text |
3023 | 2021 |
"ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$ is the same as the free-atom functions @{text |
3021 | 2022 |
"fa_ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$. This fact is important in the nominal setting where |
2023 |
the general theory is formulated in terms of support and freshness, but also |
|
2024 |
provides evidence that our notions of free-atoms and alpha-equivalence |
|
3023 | 2025 |
`match up' correctly. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2026 |
|
3017 | 2027 |
\begin{thm}\label{suppfa} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2028 |
For @{text "x"}$_{1..n}$ with type @{text "ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$, we have |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2029 |
@{text "supp x\<^isub>i = fa_ty\<AL>\<^isub>i x\<^isub>i"}. |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2030 |
\end{thm} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2031 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2032 |
\begin{proof} |
3017 | 2033 |
The proof is by induction on @{text "x"}$_{1..n}$. In each case |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2034 |
we unfold the definition of @{text "supp"}, move the swapping inside the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2035 |
term-constructors and then use the quasi-injectivity lemmas in order to complete the |
3015 | 2036 |
proof. For the abstraction cases we use then the facts derived in Theorem~\ref{suppabs}, |
2037 |
for which we have to know that every body of an abstraction is finitely supported. |
|
3016 | 2038 |
This, we have proved earlier. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2039 |
\end{proof} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2040 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2041 |
\noindent |
3023 | 2042 |
Consequently, we can replace the free-atom functions by @{text "supp"} in |
3021 | 2043 |
our quasi-injection lemmas. In the examples shown in \eqref{alphalift}, for instance, |
2044 |
we obtain for @{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and @{text "Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha>"} |
|
3016 | 2045 |
|
2046 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2047 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c @ {}} |
|
2048 |
\infer{@{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha> as t = Let\<^sup>\<alpha> as' t'"}} |
|
2049 |
{@{term "alpha_lst_ex (bn_al as, t) equal supp (bn_al as', t')"} & |
|
2050 |
\hspace{5mm}@{text "as \<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as'"}}\\ |
|
2051 |
\\ |
|
2052 |
\makebox[0mm]{\infer{@{text "Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha> as t = Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha> as' t'"}} |
|
2053 |
{@{term "alpha_lst_ex (bn_al as, ast) equ2 supp2 (bn_al as', ast')"}}}\\ |
|
2054 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2055 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2056 |
||
2057 |
\noindent |
|
3021 | 2058 |
Taking into account that the compound equivalence relation @{term |
3017 | 2059 |
"equ2"} and the compound free-atom function @{term "supp2"} are by |
2060 |
definition equal to @{term "equal"} and @{term "supp"}, respectively, the |
|
3021 | 2061 |
above rules simplify further to |
3016 | 2062 |
|
2063 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2064 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c @ {}} |
|
2065 |
\infer{@{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha> as t = Let\<^sup>\<alpha> as' t'"}} |
|
2066 |
{@{term "Abs_lst (bn_al as) t = Abs_lst (bn_al as') t'"} & |
|
2067 |
\hspace{5mm}@{text "as \<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as'"}}\\ |
|
2068 |
\\ |
|
2069 |
\makebox[0mm]{\infer{@{text "Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha> as t = Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha> as' t'"}} |
|
2070 |
{@{term "Abs_lst (bn_al as) ast = Abs_lst (bn_al as') ast'"}}}\\ |
|
2071 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2072 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2073 |
||
2074 |
\noindent |
|
3017 | 2075 |
which means we can characterise equality between term-constructors (on the |
2076 |
alpha-equated level) in terms of equality between the abstractions defined |
|
2077 |
in Section~\ref{sec:binders}. From this we can deduce the support for @{text |
|
2078 |
"Let\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and @{text "Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha>"}, namely |
|
2079 |
||
3016 | 2080 |
|
2081 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2082 |
\begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{2mm}}l@ {\hspace{2mm}}l} |
|
2083 |
@{text "supp (Let\<^sup>\<alpha> as t)"} & @{text "="} & @{text "(supp t - set (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> as)) \<union> fa\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> as"}\\ |
|
2084 |
@{text "supp (Let_rec\<^sup>\<alpha> as t)"} & @{text "="} & @{text "(supp t \<union> supp as) - set (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> as)"}\\ |
|
2085 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2086 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2087 |
||
2088 |
\noindent |
|
2089 |
using the support of abstractions derived in Theorem~\ref{suppabs}. |
|
2090 |
||
3021 | 2091 |
To sum up this section, we have established a reasoning infrastructure for the |
3015 | 2092 |
types @{text "ty\<AL>"}$_{1..n}$ by first lifting definitions from the |
3023 | 2093 |
`raw' level to the quotient level and then by proving facts about |
3015 | 2094 |
these lifted definitions. All necessary proofs are generated automatically |
2095 |
by custom ML-code. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2096 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2097 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2098 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2099 |
section {* Strong Induction Principles *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2100 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2101 |
text {* |
3015 | 2102 |
In the previous section we derived induction principles for alpha-equated |
3017 | 2103 |
terms (see \eqref{induct} for the general form and \eqref{inductex} for an |
3021 | 2104 |
example). This was done by lifting the corresponding inductions principles |
3023 | 2105 |
for `raw' terms. We already employed these induction principles for |
3021 | 2106 |
deriving several facts about alpha-equated terms, including the property that |
3023 | 2107 |
the free-atom functions and the notion of support coincide. Still, we |
3017 | 2108 |
call these induction principles \emph{weak}, because for a term-constructor, |
2109 |
say \mbox{@{text "C\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>r"}}, the induction |
|
2110 |
hypothesis requires us to establish (under some assumptions) a property |
|
2111 |
@{text "P (C\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1\<dots>x\<^isub>r)"} for \emph{all} @{text |
|
3021 | 2112 |
"x"}$_{1..r}$. The problem with this is that in the presence of binders we cannot make |
3025 | 2113 |
any assumptions about the atoms that are bound---for example assuming the variable convention. |
2114 |
One obvious way around this |
|
3017 | 2115 |
problem is to rename them. Unfortunately, this leads to very clunky proofs |
3021 | 2116 |
and makes formalisations grievous experiences (especially in the context of |
3015 | 2117 |
multiple bound atoms). |
2118 |
||
3021 | 2119 |
For the older versions of Nominal Isabelle we described in \cite{Urban08} a |
2120 |
method for automatically strengthening weak induction principles. These |
|
2121 |
stronger induction principles allow the user to make additional assumptions |
|
2122 |
about bound atoms. The advantage of these assumptions is that they make in |
|
2123 |
most cases any renaming of bound atoms unnecessary. To explain how the |
|
2124 |
strengthening works, we use as running example the lambda-calculus with |
|
2125 |
@{text "Let"}-patterns shown in \eqref{letpat}. Its weak induction principle |
|
2126 |
is given in \eqref{inductex}. The stronger induction principle is as |
|
2127 |
follows: |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2128 |
|
3015 | 2129 |
\begin{equation}\label{stronginduct} |
2130 |
\mbox{ |
|
2131 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {}} |
|
2132 |
\infer{@{text "P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> c y\<^isub>1 \<and> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> c y\<^isub>2"}} |
|
2133 |
{\begin{array}{l} |
|
2134 |
@{text "\<forall>x c. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> c (Var\<^sup>\<alpha> x)"}\\ |
|
2135 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 c. (\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> d x\<^isub>1) \<and> (\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> d x\<^isub>2) \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> c (App\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2)"}\\ |
|
3017 | 2136 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 c. atom x\<^isub>1 # c \<and> (\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> d x\<^isub>2) \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> c (Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2)"}\\ |
2137 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3 c. (set (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1)) #\<^sup>* c \<and>"}\\ |
|
3018 | 2138 |
\hspace{10mm}@{text "(\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> d x\<^isub>1) \<and> (\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> d x\<^isub>2) \<and> (\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> d x\<^isub>3) \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> c (Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3)"}\\ |
3015 | 2139 |
@{text "\<forall>x c. P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> c (PVar\<^sup>\<alpha> x)"}\\ |
2140 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 c. (\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> d x\<^isub>1) \<and> (\<forall>d. P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> d x\<^isub>2) \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> c (PTup\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2)"} |
|
2141 |
\end{array}} |
|
2142 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2143 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
2144 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2145 |
|
3015 | 2146 |
\noindent |
3021 | 2147 |
Notice that instead of establishing two properties of the form @{text " |
2148 |
P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> y\<^isub>1 \<and> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> y\<^isub>2"}, as the |
|
2149 |
weak one does, the stronger induction principle establishes the properties |
|
2150 |
of the form @{text " P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub> c y\<^isub>1 \<and> |
|
2151 |
P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub> c y\<^isub>2"} in which the additional parameter @{text |
|
2152 |
c} is assumed to be of finite support. The purpose of @{text "c"} is to |
|
3023 | 2153 |
`control' which freshness assumptions the binders should satisfy in the |
3021 | 2154 |
@{text "Lam\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and @{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha>"} cases: for @{text |
2155 |
"Lam\<^sup>\<alpha>"} we can assume the bound atom @{text "x\<^isub>1"} is fresh |
|
2156 |
for @{text "c"} (third line); for @{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha>"} we can assume |
|
2157 |
all bound atoms from an assignment are fresh for @{text "c"} (fourth |
|
3025 | 2158 |
line). In order to see how an instantiation for @{text "c"} in the |
3036 | 2159 |
conclusion `controls' the premises, one has to take into account that |
3025 | 2160 |
Isabelle/HOL is a typed logic. That means if @{text "c"} is instantiated |
2161 |
with a pair, for example, then this type-constraint will be propagated to |
|
2162 |
the premises. The main point is that if @{text "c"} is instantiated |
|
2163 |
appropriately, then the user can mimic the usual `pencil-and-paper' |
|
2164 |
reasoning employing the variable convention about bound and free variables |
|
2165 |
being distinct \cite{Urban08}. |
|
3015 | 2166 |
|
3021 | 2167 |
In what follows we will show that the weak induction principle in |
2168 |
\eqref{inductex} implies the strong one \eqref{stronginduct}. This fact was established for |
|
3018 | 2169 |
single binders in \cite{Urban08} by some quite involved, nevertheless |
3017 | 2170 |
automated, induction proof. In this paper we simplify the proof by |
3023 | 2171 |
leveraging the automated proving tools from the function package of |
2172 |
Isabelle/HOL \cite{Krauss09}. The reasoning principle behind these tools |
|
3017 | 2173 |
is well-founded induction. To use them in our setting, we have to discharge |
2174 |
two proof obligations: one is that we have well-founded measures (one for |
|
2175 |
each type @{text "ty"}$^\alpha_{1..n}$) that decrease in every induction |
|
3018 | 2176 |
step and the other is that we have covered all cases in the induction |
2177 |
principle. Once these two proof obligations are discharged, the reasoning |
|
3025 | 2178 |
infrastructure of the function package will automatically derive the |
3021 | 2179 |
stronger induction principle. This way of establishing the stronger induction |
3039 | 2180 |
principle is considerably simpler than the earlier work presented in \cite{Urban08}. |
3015 | 2181 |
|
2182 |
As measures we can use the size functions @{text "size_ty"}$^\alpha_{1..n}$, |
|
2183 |
which we lifted in the previous section and which are all well-founded. It |
|
3017 | 2184 |
is straightforward to establish that the sizes decrease in every |
3015 | 2185 |
induction step. What is left to show is that we covered all cases. |
3017 | 2186 |
To do so, we have to derive stronger cases lemmas, which look in our |
3018 | 2187 |
running example are as follows: |
3017 | 2188 |
|
2189 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
3018 | 2190 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {\hspace{4mm}}c@ {}} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2191 |
\infer{@{text "P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}} |
3017 | 2192 |
{\begin{array}{@ {}l@ {}} |
2193 |
@{text "\<forall>x. y = Var\<^sup>\<alpha> x \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}\\ |
|
2194 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. y = App\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}\\ |
|
2195 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. atom x\<^isub>1 # c \<and> y = Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}\\ |
|
3018 | 2196 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3. set (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1) #\<^sup>* c \<and> y = Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"} |
3017 | 2197 |
\end{array}} & |
2198 |
||
2199 |
\infer{@{text "P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub>"}} |
|
2200 |
{\begin{array}{@ {}l@ {}} |
|
2201 |
@{text "\<forall>x. y = PVar\<^sup>\<alpha> x \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub>"}\\ |
|
2202 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. y = PTup\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>pat\<^esub>"} |
|
2203 |
\end{array}} |
|
2204 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2205 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2206 |
||
2207 |
\noindent |
|
3021 | 2208 |
They are stronger in the sense that they allow us to assume in the @{text |
2209 |
"Lam\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and @{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha>"} cases that the bound atoms |
|
3039 | 2210 |
avoid, or being fresh for, a context @{text "c"} (which is assumed to be finitely supported). |
3018 | 2211 |
|
3023 | 2212 |
These stronger cases lemmas can be derived from the `weak' cases lemmas |
3018 | 2213 |
given in \eqref{inductex}. This is trivial in case of patterns (the one on |
2214 |
the right-hand side) since the weak and strong cases lemma coincide (there |
|
2215 |
is no binding in patterns). Interesting are only the cases for @{text |
|
2216 |
"Lam\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and @{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha>"}, where we have some binders and |
|
3021 | 2217 |
therefore have an addition assumption about avoiding @{text "c"}. Let us |
2218 |
first establish the case for @{text "Lam\<^sup>\<alpha>"}. By the weak cases lemma |
|
2219 |
\eqref{inductex} we can assume that |
|
3017 | 2220 |
|
2221 |
\begin{equation}\label{assm} |
|
2222 |
@{text "y = Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2"} |
|
2223 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
2224 |
||
2225 |
\noindent |
|
3021 | 2226 |
holds, and need to establish @{text "P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}. The stronger cases lemma has the |
3018 | 2227 |
corresponding implication |
3017 | 2228 |
|
2229 |
\begin{equation}\label{imp} |
|
2230 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2. atom x\<^isub>1 # c \<and> y = Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"} |
|
2231 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
|
2232 |
||
2233 |
\noindent |
|
3025 | 2234 |
which we must use in order to infer @{text "P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}. Clearly, we cannot |
3023 | 2235 |
use this implication directly, because we have no information whether or not @{text |
3017 | 2236 |
"x\<^isub>1"} is fresh for @{text "c"}. However, we can use Properties |
3039 | 2237 |
\ref{supppermeq} and \ref{avoiding} to rename @{text "x\<^isub>1"}. We know |
3017 | 2238 |
by Theorem~\ref{suppfa} that @{text "{atom x\<^isub>1} #\<^sup>* Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> |
2239 |
x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2"} (since its support is @{text "supp x\<^isub>2 - |
|
3021 | 2240 |
{atom x\<^isub>1}"}). Property \ref{avoiding} provides us then with a |
3017 | 2241 |
permutation @{text "\<pi>"}, such that @{text "{atom (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1)} #\<^sup>* |
2242 |
c"} and \mbox{@{text "supp (Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2) #\<^sup>* \<pi>"}} hold. |
|
3021 | 2243 |
By using Property \ref{supppermeq}, we can infer from the latter that |
2244 |
||
2245 |
\[ |
|
2246 |
@{text "Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1) (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>2) = Lam\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2"} |
|
2247 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2248 |
||
2249 |
\noindent |
|
2250 |
holds. We can use this equation in the assumption \eqref{assm}, and hence |
|
2251 |
use the implication \eqref{imp} with the renamed @{text "\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1"} |
|
2252 |
and @{text "\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>2"} for concluding this case. |
|
3017 | 2253 |
|
3018 | 2254 |
The @{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha>"}-case involving a deep binder is slightly more complicated. |
3017 | 2255 |
We have the assumption |
2256 |
||
3018 | 2257 |
\begin{equation}\label{assmtwo} |
2258 |
@{text "y = Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3"} |
|
3017 | 2259 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
2260 |
||
2261 |
\noindent |
|
3021 | 2262 |
and the implication from the stronger cases lemma |
3018 | 2263 |
|
3021 | 2264 |
\begin{equation}\label{impletpat} |
3018 | 2265 |
@{text "\<forall>x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3. set (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1) #\<^sup>* c \<and> y = Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3 \<Rightarrow> P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"} |
3021 | 2266 |
\end{equation}\smallskip |
3018 | 2267 |
|
2268 |
\noindent |
|
3023 | 2269 |
The reason that this case is more complicated is that we cannot directly apply Property |
3018 | 2270 |
\ref{avoiding} for obtaining a renaming permutation. Property \ref{avoiding} requires |
2271 |
that the binders are fresh for the term in which we want to perform the renaming. But |
|
3023 | 2272 |
this is not true in terms such as (using an informal notation) |
3017 | 2273 |
|
2274 |
\[ |
|
3018 | 2275 |
@{text "Let (x, y) := (x, y) in (x, y)"} |
2276 |
\]\smallskip |
|
3017 | 2277 |
|
3018 | 2278 |
\noindent |
3025 | 2279 |
where @{text x} and @{text y} are bound in the term, but are also free |
3023 | 2280 |
in the right-hand side of the assignment. We can, however, obtain such a renaming permutation, say |
3021 | 2281 |
@{text "\<pi>"}, for the abstraction @{term "Abs_lst (bn_al x\<^isub>1) |
2282 |
x\<^isub>3"}. As a result we have \mbox{@{term "set (bn_al (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1)) |
|
2283 |
\<sharp>* c"}} and @{term "Abs_lst (bn_al (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1)) (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>3) = |
|
2284 |
Abs_lst (bn_al x\<^isub>1) x\<^isub>3"} (remember @{text "set"} and @{text |
|
2285 |
"bn\<^sup>\<alpha>"} are equivariant). Now the quasi-injective property for @{text |
|
2286 |
"Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha>"} states that |
|
3018 | 2287 |
|
2288 |
\[ |
|
2289 |
\infer{@{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> p t\<^isub>1 t\<^isub>2 = Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> p\<PRIME> t\<PRIME>\<^isub>1 t\<PRIME>\<^isub>2"}} |
|
2290 |
{@{text "[bn\<^sup>\<alpha> p]\<^bsub>list\<^esub>. t\<^isub>2 = [bn\<^sup>\<alpha> p']\<^bsub>list\<^esub>. t\<PRIME>\<^isub>2"}\;\; & |
|
2291 |
@{text "p \<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> p\<PRIME>"}\;\; & @{text "t\<^isub>1 = t\<PRIME>\<^isub>1"}} |
|
3017 | 2292 |
\]\smallskip |
2293 |
||
3018 | 2294 |
\noindent |
3021 | 2295 |
Since all atoms in a pattern are bound by @{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha>"}, we can infer |
3023 | 2296 |
that @{text "(\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1) \<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x\<^isub>1"} holds for every @{text "\<pi>"}. Therefore we have that |
3017 | 2297 |
|
3018 | 2298 |
\[ |
2299 |
@{text "Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1) x\<^isub>2 (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>3) = Let_pat\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2 x\<^isub>3"} |
|
2300 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2301 |
||
2302 |
\noindent |
|
3023 | 2303 |
Taking the left-hand side in the assumption shown in \eqref{assmtwo}, we can use |
3021 | 2304 |
the implication \eqref{impletpat} from the stronger cases lemma to infer @{text "P\<^bsub>trm\<^esub>"}, as needed. |
3018 | 2305 |
|
3023 | 2306 |
The remaining difficulty is when a deep binder contains some atoms that are |
2307 |
bound and some that are free. An example is @{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha>"} in |
|
3025 | 2308 |
\eqref{letrecs}. In such cases @{text "(\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1) |
3023 | 2309 |
\<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x\<^isub>1"} does not hold in general. The idea however is |
2310 |
that @{text "\<pi>"} only renames atoms that become bound. In this way @{text "\<pi>"} |
|
3025 | 2311 |
does not affect @{text "\<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub>"} (which only tracks alpha-equivalence of terms that are not |
2312 |
under the binder). However, the problem is that the |
|
3039 | 2313 |
permutation operation @{text "\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>1"} applies to all atoms in @{text "x\<^isub>1"}. To avoid this |
3021 | 2314 |
we introduce an auxiliary permutation operations, written @{text "_ |
2315 |
\<bullet>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> _"}, for deep binders that only permutes bound atoms (or |
|
2316 |
more precisely the atoms specified by the @{text "bn"}-functions) and leaves |
|
3023 | 2317 |
the other atoms unchanged. Like the functions @{text "fa_bn"}$_{1..m}$, we |
3025 | 2318 |
can define these permutation operations over raw terms analysing how the functions @{text |
3023 | 2319 |
"bn"}$_{1..m}$ are defined. Assuming the user specified a clause |
3017 | 2320 |
|
3019 | 2321 |
\[ |
2322 |
@{text "bn (C x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r) = rhs"} |
|
2323 |
\]\smallskip |
|
3017 | 2324 |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2325 |
\noindent |
3019 | 2326 |
we define @{text "\<pi> \<bullet>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> (C x\<^isub>1 \<dots> x\<^isub>r) \<equiv> C y\<^isub>1 \<dots> y\<^isub>r"} with @{text "y\<^isub>i"} determined as follows: |
2327 |
||
2328 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2329 |
\begin{tabular}{c@ {\hspace{2mm}}p{0.9\textwidth}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2330 |
$\bullet$ & @{text "y\<^isub>i \<equiv> x\<^isub>i"} provided @{text "x\<^isub>i"} does not occur in @{text "rhs"}\\ |
3019 | 2331 |
$\bullet$ & @{text "y\<^isub>i \<equiv> \<pi> \<bullet>\<^bsub>bn'\<^esub> x\<^isub>i"} provided @{text "bn' x\<^isub>i"} is in @{text "rhs"}\\ |
2332 |
$\bullet$ & @{text "y\<^isub>i \<equiv> \<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>i"} otherwise |
|
2333 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2334 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2335 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2336 |
\noindent |
3025 | 2337 |
Using again the quotient package we can lift the auxiliary permutation operations |
2338 |
@{text "_ \<bullet>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> _"} |
|
3039 | 2339 |
to alpha-equated terms. Moreover we can prove the following two properties |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2340 |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2341 |
\begin{lem}\label{permutebn} |
3023 | 2342 |
Given a binding function @{text "bn\<^sup>\<alpha>"} and auxiliary equivalence @{text "\<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub>"} |
2343 |
then for all @{text "\<pi>"}\smallskip\\ |
|
3019 | 2344 |
{\it (i)} @{text "\<pi> \<bullet> (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x) = bn\<^sup>\<alpha> (\<pi> \<bullet>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x)"} and\\ |
2345 |
{\it (ii)} @{text "(\<pi> \<bullet>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x) \<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x"}. |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2346 |
\end{lem} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2347 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2348 |
\begin{proof} |
3021 | 2349 |
By induction on @{text x}. The properties follow by unfolding of the |
2350 |
definitions. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2351 |
\end{proof} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2352 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2353 |
\noindent |
3021 | 2354 |
The first property states that a permutation applied to a binding function |
2355 |
is equivalent to first permuting the binders and then calculating the bound |
|
3025 | 2356 |
atoms. The second states that @{text "_ \<bullet>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> _"} preserves |
3021 | 2357 |
@{text "\<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub>"}. The main point of the auxiliary |
3039 | 2358 |
permutation functions is that they allow us to rename just the bound atoms in a |
3021 | 2359 |
term, without changing anything else. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2360 |
|
3019 | 2361 |
Having the auxiliary permutation function in place, we can now solve all remaining cases. |
3021 | 2362 |
For the @{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha>"} term-constructor, for example, we can by Property \ref{avoiding} |
3019 | 2363 |
obtain a @{text "\<pi>"} such that |
2364 |
||
2365 |
\[ |
|
2366 |
@{text "(\<pi> \<bullet> (set (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1)) #\<^sup>* c"} \hspace{10mm} |
|
2367 |
@{text "\<pi> \<bullet> [bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1]\<^bsub>list\<^esub>. x\<^isub>2 = [bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1]\<^bsub>list\<^esub>. x\<^isub>2"} |
|
2368 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2369 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2370 |
\noindent |
3023 | 2371 |
hold. Using the first part of Lemma \ref{permutebn}, we can simplify this |
3019 | 2372 |
to @{text "set (bn\<^sup>\<alpha> (\<pi> \<bullet>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x\<^isub>1)) #\<^sup>* c"} and |
3025 | 2373 |
\mbox{@{text "[bn\<^sup>\<alpha> (\<pi> \<bullet>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x\<^isub>1)]\<^bsub>list\<^esub>. (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>2) = [bn\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1]\<^bsub>list\<^esub>. x\<^isub>2"}}. Since |
2374 |
@{text "(\<pi> \<bullet>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x\<^isub>1) \<approx>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x\<^isub>1"} holds by the second part, |
|
3019 | 2375 |
we can infer that |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2376 |
|
3019 | 2377 |
\[ |
2378 |
@{text "Let\<^sup>\<alpha> (\<pi> \<bullet>\<AL>\<^bsub>bn\<^esub> x\<^isub>1) (\<pi> \<bullet> x\<^isub>2) = Let\<^sup>\<alpha> x\<^isub>1 x\<^isub>2"} |
|
2379 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2380 |
||
2381 |
\noindent |
|
3021 | 2382 |
holds. This allows us to use the implication from the strong cases |
3025 | 2383 |
lemma, and we are done. |
3017 | 2384 |
|
3023 | 2385 |
Conseqently, we can discharge all proof-obligations about having covered all |
2386 |
cases. This completes the proof establishing that the weak induction principles imply |
|
2387 |
the strong induction principles. These strong induction principles have proved |
|
2388 |
already to be very useful in practice, particularly for proving properties about |
|
2389 |
capture-avoiding substitution. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2390 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2391 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2392 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2393 |
section {* Related Work\label{related} *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2394 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2395 |
text {* |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2396 |
To our knowledge the earliest usage of general binders in a theorem prover |
3010 | 2397 |
is described by Nara\-schew\-ski and Nipkow \cite{NaraschewskiNipkow99} with a |
2398 |
formalisation of the algorithm W. This formalisation implements binding in |
|
2399 |
type-schemes using a de-Bruijn indices representation. Since type-schemes in |
|
2400 |
W contain only a single place where variables are bound, different indices |
|
2401 |
do not refer to different binders (as in the usual de-Bruijn |
|
2402 |
representation), but to different bound variables. A similar idea has been |
|
3023 | 2403 |
recently explored for general binders by Chargu\'eraud \cite{chargueraud09} |
2404 |
in the locally nameless approach to |
|
2405 |
binding. There, de-Bruijn indices consist of two |
|
3010 | 2406 |
numbers, one referring to the place where a variable is bound, and the other |
2407 |
to which variable is bound. The reasoning infrastructure for both |
|
2408 |
representations of bindings comes for free in theorem provers like |
|
3013 | 2409 |
Isabelle/HOL and Coq, since the corresponding term-calculi can be implemented |
3023 | 2410 |
as `normal' datatypes. However, in both approaches it seems difficult to |
2411 |
achieve our fine-grained control over the `semantics' of bindings |
|
3010 | 2412 |
(i.e.~whether the order of binders should matter, or vacuous binders should |
2413 |
be taken into account). To do so, one would require additional predicates |
|
2414 |
that filter out unwanted terms. Our guess is that such predicates result in |
|
3013 | 2415 |
rather intricate formal reasoning. We are not aware of any formalisation of |
2416 |
a non-trivial language that uses Chargu\'eraud's idea. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2417 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2418 |
Another technique for representing binding is higher-order abstract syntax |
3023 | 2419 |
(HOAS), which for example is implemented in the Twelf system \cite{pfenningsystem}. |
2420 |
This representation technique supports very elegantly many aspects of |
|
3024 | 2421 |
\emph{single} binding, and impressive work by Lee et al~\cite{LeeCraryHarper07} |
3023 | 2422 |
has been done that uses HOAS for mechanising the metatheory of SML. We |
3010 | 2423 |
are, however, not aware how multiple binders of SML are represented in this |
2424 |
work. Judging from the submitted Twelf-solution for the POPLmark challenge, |
|
2425 |
HOAS cannot easily deal with binding constructs where the number of bound |
|
3023 | 2426 |
variables is not fixed. For example, in the second part of this challenge, |
3010 | 2427 |
@{text "Let"}s involve patterns that bind multiple variables at once. In |
2428 |
such situations, HOAS seems to have to resort to the |
|
2429 |
iterated-single-binders-approach with all the unwanted consequences when |
|
2430 |
reasoning about the resulting terms. |
|
2431 |
||
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2432 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2433 |
Two formalisations involving general binders have been |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2434 |
performed in older |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2435 |
versions of Nominal Isabelle (one about Psi-calculi and one about algorithm W |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2436 |
\cite{BengtsonParow09,UrbanNipkow09}). Both |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2437 |
use the approach based on iterated single binders. Our experience with |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2438 |
the latter formalisation has been disappointing. The major pain arose from |
3023 | 2439 |
the need to `unbind' variables. This can be done in one step with our |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2440 |
general binders described in this paper, but needs a cumbersome |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2441 |
iteration with single binders. The resulting formal reasoning turned out to |
3010 | 2442 |
be rather unpleasant. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2443 |
|
3010 | 2444 |
The most closely related work to the one presented here is the Ott-tool by |
2445 |
Sewell et al \cite{ott-jfp} and the C$\alpha$ml language by Pottier |
|
2446 |
\cite{Pottier06}. Ott is a nifty front-end for creating \LaTeX{} documents |
|
2447 |
from specifications of term-calculi involving general binders. For a subset |
|
3023 | 2448 |
of the specifications Ott can also generate theorem prover code using a `raw' |
3010 | 2449 |
representation of terms, and in Coq also a locally nameless |
2450 |
representation. The developers of this tool have also put forward (on paper) |
|
2451 |
a definition for alpha-equivalence and free variables for terms that can be |
|
2452 |
specified in Ott. This definition is rather different from ours, not using |
|
2453 |
any nominal techniques. To our knowledge there is no concrete mathematical |
|
2454 |
result concerning this notion of alpha-equivalence and free variables. We |
|
2455 |
have proved that our definitions lead to alpha-equated terms, whose support |
|
3025 | 2456 |
is as expected (that means bound atoms are removed from the support). We |
3023 | 2457 |
also showed that our specifications lift from `raw' types to types of |
3011 | 2458 |
alpha-equivalence classes. For this we had to establish (automatically) that every |
3023 | 2459 |
term-constructor and function defined for `raw' types |
2460 |
is respectful w.r.t.~alpha-equivalence. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2461 |
|
3010 | 2462 |
Although we were heavily inspired by the syntax of Ott, its definition of |
2463 |
alpha-equi\-valence is unsuitable for our extension of Nominal |
|
2464 |
Isabelle. First, it is far too complicated to be a basis for automated |
|
2465 |
proofs implemented on the ML-level of Isabelle/HOL. Second, it covers cases |
|
2466 |
of binders depending on other binders, which just do not make sense for our |
|
2467 |
alpha-equated terms. Third, it allows empty types that have no meaning in a |
|
2468 |
HOL-based theorem prover. We also had to generalise slightly Ott's binding |
|
2469 |
clauses. In Ott one specifies binding clauses with a single body; we allow |
|
2470 |
more than one. We have to do this, because this makes a difference for our |
|
2471 |
notion of alpha-equivalence in case of \isacommand{binds (set)} and |
|
2472 |
\isacommand{binds (set+)}. Consider the examples |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2473 |
|
3010 | 2474 |
\[\mbox{ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2475 |
\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {\hspace{2mm}}l@ {}} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2476 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>1 xs::name fset t::trm s::trm"} & |
3004 | 2477 |
\isacommand{binds (set)} @{text "xs"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t s"}\\ |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2478 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>2 xs::name fset t::trm s::trm"} & |
3004 | 2479 |
\isacommand{binds (set)} @{text "xs"} \isacommand{in} @{text "t"}, |
2480 |
\isacommand{binds (set)} @{text "xs"} \isacommand{in} @{text "s"}\\ |
|
3010 | 2481 |
\end{tabular}} |
2482 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2483 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2484 |
\noindent |
3010 | 2485 |
In the first term-constructor we have a single body that happens to be |
3023 | 2486 |
`spread' over two arguments; in the second term-constructor we have two |
3010 | 2487 |
independent bodies in which the same variables are bound. As a result we |
2488 |
have\footnote{Assuming @{term "a \<noteq> b"}, there is no permutation that can |
|
3011 | 2489 |
make @{text "(a, b)"} equal with both @{text "(a, b)"} and @{text "(b, a)"}, but |
3010 | 2490 |
there are two permutations so that we can make @{text "(a, b)"} and @{text |
2491 |
"(a, b)"} equal with one permutation, and @{text "(a, b)"} and @{text "(b, |
|
2492 |
a)"} with the other.} |
|
2493 |
||
2494 |
||
2495 |
\[\mbox{ |
|
2496 |
\begin{tabular}{r@ {\hspace{1.5mm}}c@ {\hspace{1.5mm}}l} |
|
2497 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>1 {a, b} (a, b) (a, b)"} & $\not=$ & |
|
2498 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>1 {a, b} (a, b) (b, a)"} |
|
2499 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2500 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2501 |
||
2502 |
\noindent |
|
2503 |
but |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2504 |
|
3010 | 2505 |
\[\mbox{ |
2506 |
\begin{tabular}{r@ {\hspace{1.5mm}}c@ {\hspace{1.5mm}}l} |
|
2507 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>2 {a, b} (a, b) (a, b)"} & $=$ & |
|
2508 |
@{text "Foo\<^isub>2 {a, b} (a, b) (b, a)"}\\ |
|
2509 |
\end{tabular}} |
|
2510 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2511 |
||
2512 |
\noindent |
|
2513 |
and therefore need the extra generality to be able to distinguish between |
|
2514 |
both specifications. Because of how we set up our definitions, we also had |
|
2515 |
to impose some restrictions (like a single binding function for a deep |
|
2516 |
binder) that are not present in Ott. Our expectation is that we can still |
|
2517 |
cover many interesting term-calculi from programming language research, for |
|
3023 | 2518 |
example the Core-Haskell language from the Introduction. With the work |
3025 | 2519 |
presented in this paper we can define it formally as shown in |
3023 | 2520 |
Figure~\ref{nominalcorehas} and then Nominal Isabelle derives automatically |
2521 |
a corresponding reasoning infrastructure. |
|
3013 | 2522 |
|
3023 | 2523 |
\begin{figure}[p] |
3013 | 2524 |
\begin{boxedminipage}{\linewidth} |
2525 |
\small |
|
2526 |
\begin{tabular}{l} |
|
2527 |
\isacommand{atom\_decl}~@{text "var cvar tvar"}\\[1mm] |
|
2528 |
\isacommand{nominal\_datatype}~@{text "tkind ="}~@{text "KStar"}~$|$~@{text "KFun tkind tkind"}\\ |
|
2529 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "ckind ="}~@{text "CKSim ty ty"}\\ |
|
2530 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "ty ="}~@{text "TVar tvar"}~$|$~@{text "T string"}~$|$~@{text "TApp ty ty"}\\ |
|
2531 |
$|$~@{text "TFun string ty_list"}~% |
|
2532 |
$|$~@{text "TAll tv::tvar tkind ty::ty"}\hspace{3mm}\isacommand{binds}~@{text "tv"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text ty}\\ |
|
2533 |
$|$~@{text "TArr ckind ty"}\\ |
|
2534 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "ty_lst ="}~@{text "TNil"}~$|$~@{text "TCons ty ty_lst"}\\ |
|
2535 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "cty ="}~@{text "CVar cvar"}~% |
|
2536 |
$|$~@{text "C string"}~$|$~@{text "CApp cty cty"}~$|$~@{text "CFun string co_lst"}\\ |
|
2537 |
$|$~@{text "CAll cv::cvar ckind cty::cty"}\hspace{3mm}\isacommand{binds}~@{text "cv"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text cty}\\ |
|
2538 |
$|$~@{text "CArr ckind cty"}~$|$~@{text "CRefl ty"}~$|$~@{text "CSym cty"}~$|$~@{text "CCirc cty cty"}\\ |
|
2539 |
$|$~@{text "CAt cty ty"}~$|$~@{text "CLeft cty"}~$|$~@{text "CRight cty"}~$|$~@{text "CSim cty cty"}\\ |
|
2540 |
$|$~@{text "CRightc cty"}~$|$~@{text "CLeftc cty"}~$|$~@{text "Coerce cty cty"}\\ |
|
2541 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "co_lst ="}~@{text "CNil"}~$|$~@{text "CCons cty co_lst"}\\ |
|
2542 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "trm ="}~@{text "Var var"}~$|$~@{text "K string"}\\ |
|
2543 |
$|$~@{text "LAM_ty tv::tvar tkind t::trm"}\hspace{3mm}\isacommand{binds}~@{text "tv"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text t}\\ |
|
2544 |
$|$~@{text "LAM_cty cv::cvar ckind t::trm"}\hspace{3mm}\isacommand{binds}~@{text "cv"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text t}\\ |
|
2545 |
$|$~@{text "App_ty trm ty"}~$|$~@{text "App_cty trm cty"}~$|$~@{text "App trm trm"}\\ |
|
2546 |
$|$~@{text "Lam v::var ty t::trm"}\hspace{3mm}\isacommand{binds}~@{text "v"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text t}\\ |
|
2547 |
$|$~@{text "Let x::var ty trm t::trm"}\hspace{3mm}\isacommand{binds}~@{text x}~\isacommand{in}~@{text t}\\ |
|
2548 |
$|$~@{text "Case trm assoc_lst"}~$|$~@{text "Cast trm co"}\\ |
|
2549 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "assoc_lst ="}~@{text ANil}~% |
|
2550 |
$|$~@{text "ACons p::pat t::trm assoc_lst"}\hspace{3mm}\isacommand{binds}~@{text "bv p"}~\isacommand{in}~@{text t}\\ |
|
2551 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "pat ="}~@{text "Kpat string tvtk_lst tvck_lst vt_lst"}\\ |
|
2552 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "vt_lst ="}~@{text VTNil}~$|$~@{text "VTCons var ty vt_lst"}\\ |
|
2553 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "tvtk_lst ="}~@{text TVTKNil}~$|$~@{text "TVTKCons tvar tkind tvtk_lst"}\\ |
|
2554 |
\isacommand{and}~@{text "tvck_lst ="}~@{text TVCKNil}~$|$ @{text "TVCKCons cvar ckind tvck_lst"}\\ |
|
2555 |
\isacommand{binder}\\ |
|
2556 |
@{text "bv :: pat \<Rightarrow> atom list"}~\isacommand{and}\\ |
|
2557 |
@{text "bv\<^isub>1 :: vt_lst \<Rightarrow> atom list"}~\isacommand{and}\\ |
|
2558 |
@{text "bv\<^isub>2 :: tvtk_lst \<Rightarrow> atom list"}~\isacommand{and}\\ |
|
2559 |
@{text "bv\<^isub>3 :: tvck_lst \<Rightarrow> atom list"}\\ |
|
2560 |
\isacommand{where}\\ |
|
2561 |
\phantom{$|$}~@{text "bv (K s tvts tvcs vs) = (bv\<^isub>3 tvts) @ (bv\<^isub>2 tvcs) @ (bv\<^isub>1 vs)"}\\ |
|
2562 |
$|$~@{text "bv\<^isub>1 VTNil = []"}\\ |
|
2563 |
$|$~@{text "bv\<^isub>1 (VTCons x ty tl) = (atom x)::(bv\<^isub>1 tl)"}\\ |
|
2564 |
$|$~@{text "bv\<^isub>2 TVTKNil = []"}\\ |
|
2565 |
$|$~@{text "bv\<^isub>2 (TVTKCons a ty tl) = (atom a)::(bv\<^isub>2 tl)"}\\ |
|
2566 |
$|$~@{text "bv\<^isub>3 TVCKNil = []"}\\ |
|
2567 |
$|$~@{text "bv\<^isub>3 (TVCKCons c cty tl) = (atom c)::(bv\<^isub>3 tl)"}\\ |
|
2568 |
\end{tabular} |
|
2569 |
\end{boxedminipage} |
|
3023 | 2570 |
\caption{A definition for Core-Haskell in Nominal Isabelle. For the moment we |
3013 | 2571 |
do not support nested types; therefore we explicitly have to unfold the |
3025 | 2572 |
lists @{text "co_lst"}, @{text "assoc_lst"} and so on. Apart from that limitation, the |
3023 | 2573 |
definition follows closely the original shown in Figure~\ref{corehas}. The |
2574 |
point of our work is that having made such a definition in Nominal Isabelle, |
|
2575 |
one obtains automatically a reasoning infrastructure for Core-Haskell. |
|
3013 | 2576 |
\label{nominalcorehas}} |
2577 |
\end{figure} |
|
3023 | 2578 |
\afterpage{\clearpage} |
3010 | 2579 |
|
2580 |
Pottier presents a programming language, called C$\alpha$ml, for |
|
2581 |
representing terms with general binders inside OCaml \cite{Pottier06}. This |
|
2582 |
language is implemented as a front-end that can be translated to OCaml with |
|
2583 |
the help of a library. He presents a type-system in which the scope of |
|
2584 |
general binders can be specified using special markers, written @{text |
|
2585 |
"inner"} and @{text "outer"}. It seems our and his specifications can be |
|
2586 |
inter-translated as long as ours use the binding mode \isacommand{binds} |
|
2587 |
only. However, we have not proved this. Pottier gives a definition for |
|
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2588 |
alpha-equivalence, which also uses a permutation operation (like ours). |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2589 |
Still, this definition is rather different from ours and he only proves that |
3010 | 2590 |
it defines an equivalence relation. A complete reasoning infrastructure is |
2591 |
well beyond the purposes of his language. Similar work for Haskell with |
|
2592 |
similar results was reported by Cheney \cite{Cheney05a} and more recently |
|
3011 | 2593 |
by Weirich et al \cite{WeirichYorgeySheard11}. |
3010 | 2594 |
|
2595 |
In a slightly different domain (programming with dependent types), |
|
3011 | 2596 |
Altenkirch et al \cite{Altenkirch10} present a calculus with a notion of |
2597 |
alpha-equivalence related to our binding mode \isacommand{binds (set+)}. |
|
3010 | 2598 |
Their definition is similar to the one by Pottier, except that it has a more |
2599 |
operational flavour and calculates a partial (renaming) map. In this way, |
|
2600 |
the definition can deal with vacuous binders. However, to our best |
|
2601 |
knowledge, no concrete mathematical result concerning this definition of |
|
2602 |
alpha-equivalence has been proved. |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2603 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2604 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2605 |
section {* Conclusion *} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2606 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2607 |
text {* |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2608 |
|
3010 | 2609 |
We have presented an extension of Nominal Isabelle for dealing with general |
3023 | 2610 |
binders, that is where term-constructors have multiple bound atoms. For this |
3010 | 2611 |
extension we introduced new definitions of alpha-equivalence and automated |
2612 |
all necessary proofs in Isabelle/HOL. To specify general binders we used |
|
2613 |
the syntax from Ott, but extended it in some places and restricted |
|
3023 | 2614 |
it in others so that the definitions make sense in the context of alpha-equated |
3010 | 2615 |
terms. We also introduced two binding modes (set and set+) that do not exist |
2616 |
in Ott. We have tried out the extension with calculi such as Core-Haskell, |
|
2617 |
type-schemes and approximately a dozen of other typical examples from |
|
2618 |
programming language research~\cite{SewellBestiary}. The code will |
|
2619 |
eventually become part of the next Isabelle distribution.\footnote{It |
|
3023 | 2620 |
can be downloaded already from \href{http://isabelle.in.tum.de/nominal/download} |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2621 |
{http://isabelle.in.tum.de/nominal/download}.} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2622 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2623 |
We have left out a discussion about how functions can be defined over |
3013 | 2624 |
alpha-equated terms involving general binders. In earlier versions of |
2625 |
Nominal Isabelle this turned out to be a thorny issue. We hope to do better |
|
2626 |
this time by using the function package \cite{Krauss09} that has recently |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2627 |
been implemented in Isabelle/HOL and also by restricting function |
3013 | 2628 |
definitions to equivariant functions (for them we can provide more |
2629 |
automation). |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2630 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2631 |
There are some restrictions we imposed in this paper that we would like to lift in |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2632 |
future work. One is the exclusion of nested datatype definitions. Nested |
3041
119b9f7e34c0
added comments from Andrei
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
3039
diff
changeset
|
2633 |
datatype definitions would allow one to specify, for instance, the function kinds |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2634 |
in Core-Haskell as @{text "TFun string (ty list)"} instead of the unfolded |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2635 |
version @{text "TFun string ty_list"} (see Figure~\ref{nominalcorehas}). To |
3010 | 2636 |
achieve this, we need more clever implementation than we have |
2637 |
at the moment. However, really lifting this restriction will involve major |
|
3023 | 2638 |
work on the underlying datatype package of Isabelle/HOL. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2639 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2640 |
A more interesting line of investigation is whether we can go beyond the |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2641 |
simple-minded form of binding functions that we adopted from Ott. At the moment, binding |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2642 |
functions can only return the empty set, a singleton atom set or unions |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2643 |
of atom sets (similarly for lists). It remains to be seen whether |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2644 |
properties like |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2645 |
|
3010 | 2646 |
\[ |
2647 |
\mbox{@{text "fa_ty x = bn x \<union> fa_bn x"}} |
|
2648 |
\]\smallskip |
|
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2649 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2650 |
\noindent |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2651 |
allow us to support more interesting binding functions. |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2652 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2653 |
We have also not yet played with other binding modes. For example we can |
3010 | 2654 |
imagine that there is need for a binding mode where instead of usual lists, |
2655 |
we abstract lists of distinct elements (the corresponding type @{text |
|
2656 |
"dlist"} already exists in the library of Isabelle/HOL). We expect the |
|
3039 | 2657 |
presented work can be extended to accommodate such binding modes.\medskip |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2658 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2659 |
\noindent |
2989
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2660 |
{\bf Acknowledgements:} We are very grateful to Andrew Pitts for many |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2661 |
discussions about Nominal Isabelle. We thank Peter Sewell for making the |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2662 |
informal notes \cite{SewellBestiary} available to us and also for patiently |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2663 |
explaining some of the finer points of the Ott-tool. Stephanie Weirich |
5df574281b69
more on the intro and correct style-files
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
2985
diff
changeset
|
2664 |
suggested to separate the subgrammars of kinds and types in our Core-Haskell |
3041
119b9f7e34c0
added comments from Andrei
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
3039
diff
changeset
|
2665 |
example. Ramana Kumar and Andrei Popescu helped us with comments about |
119b9f7e34c0
added comments from Andrei
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
3039
diff
changeset
|
2666 |
an earlier version of this paper. |
2985
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2667 |
*} |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2668 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2669 |
|
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2670 |
(*<*) |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2671 |
end |
05ccb61aa628
started lmcs paper (isabelle make lmcs)
Christian Urban <urbanc@in.tum.de>
parents:
diff
changeset
|
2672 |
(*>*) |